Google
This is a digital copy of a book that was preserved for generations on library shelves before it was carefully scanned by Google as part of a project
to make the world's books discoverable online.
It has survived long enough for the copyright to expire and the book to enter the public domain. A public domain book is one that was never subject
to copyright or whose legal copyright term has expired. Whether a book is in the public domain may vary country to country. Public domain books
are our gateways to the past, representing a wealth of history, culture and knowledge that's often difficult to discover.
Marks, notations and other maiginalia present in the original volume will appear in this file - a reminder of this book's long journey from the
publisher to a library and finally to you.
Usage guidelines
Google is proud to partner with libraries to digitize public domain materials and make them widely accessible. Public domain books belong to the
public and we are merely their custodians. Nevertheless, this work is expensive, so in order to keep providing tliis resource, we liave taken steps to
prevent abuse by commercial parties, including placing technical restrictions on automated querying.
We also ask that you:
+ Make non-commercial use of the files We designed Google Book Search for use by individuals, and we request that you use these files for
personal, non-commercial purposes.
+ Refrain fivm automated querying Do not send automated queries of any sort to Google's system: If you are conducting research on machine
translation, optical character recognition or other areas where access to a large amount of text is helpful, please contact us. We encourage the
use of public domain materials for these purposes and may be able to help.
+ Maintain attributionTht GoogXt "watermark" you see on each file is essential for in forming people about this project and helping them find
additional materials through Google Book Search. Please do not remove it.
+ Keep it legal Whatever your use, remember that you are responsible for ensuring that what you are doing is legal. Do not assume that just
because we believe a book is in the public domain for users in the United States, that the work is also in the public domain for users in other
countries. Whether a book is still in copyright varies from country to country, and we can't offer guidance on whether any specific use of
any specific book is allowed. Please do not assume that a book's appearance in Google Book Search means it can be used in any manner
anywhere in the world. Copyright infringement liabili^ can be quite severe.
About Google Book Search
Google's mission is to organize the world's information and to make it universally accessible and useful. Google Book Search helps readers
discover the world's books while helping authors and publishers reach new audiences. You can search through the full text of this book on the web
at |http: //books .google .com/I
ni!i'
n
^ilmJlmfhjtm A^K^^,
'4>rit,f^;L
ABRIDGMENT
OF
RHENIUS' TAMIL GRAMMAR.
SECOND CPITION.
WITH ADDITIONS AND IMPBOVEMENTS.
MADRAS:
AMERICAN MISSION PRESS.
TO BE HAD AT THE PRESS, ALSO OF E. S. MINOB, JAFFNA,
AND OF BEV. H. CHEBBY, MADUBA
1845.
Prict One Rupee.
S^4 f / ^^
t^?C
PREFACE.
This little work in intended especially finr Schoolsr.
The first edition of the Abridgmenti though hastBy
prepared and badly |Mrtnted, having been found uaeful,
it was thought worth & careful revision^ and consider*
able enlargement Though still an Abridgment of
the larger TalimMe Grammar of the JSer. C 7*. £•
Ji&6nui»— which is frequently referred to> and will
therefore be also needed by the thorough student-
it will be found to contain no little original matter;
especially a careful ttoalyais of the Terbal nouns, a
chapter nearly new on <0u5^<£4|d^, some rules sub*
stituted for those in the larger Grammar, and others
revised, and^ it is thought, improved. The object
has been to make loose statements precise, obscure
rules perspicuous^ and to add needed explanations
and rules.
It was at first intended, at the suggestion of some
engaged in the education of youth, to have all the
leading rules of the Syntax arranged] and numbered
after the manner of European Grammars; and seve-
ir PREFACE.
ral of them were thus arranged and printed : but it
was found that a great part of the Syntax must in
this case be re-cast to give them a proper shape,
which would be inconsistent with the design of an
Abridgment. This is offered as an apology to those
who may be expecting to see the work more simpli-
fied to young learners, than it can be in its present
form.
As it is, there can be no reason to doubt that, at
a price rendering it accessible to children and youth
in the Schools, as well as to more advanced students
— who may find it a valuable adjunct even to the
larger Grammar, which they will of course not be
without — this little manual will prove highly conveni-
ent and useful to those, understandmg £nglish, who
would learn or teach Tamil grammatically.
That it may thus aid in the study of the language,
as the medium for conveying most important truth,
and especially the knowledge of salvation, to multi-
tudes now wandering in the darkness of Heathenism,
and of leading them to the "light of life," is the
earnest wbh and prayer of the
PUBLISHERS.
ERRATA.
Page 96. The last sentence on the page should
be @uQunLg^&60ia(jpei5iUaj€u^ijS(S3idQfo^*
Page 105. The paragraph near the middle of the
page should be as follows :
If there be more than one adverb, £.t2> must be
added to each, either before or after ^lu, thus: eurr
or 6ijfT€GTih SLiu!r(ip&T€tT^niL\tbtDS6Sii£i(L\esiUiu^nim£(!^&d^
rosit ^he heaven is high and glorious.
NOTE.
In the first 36 pages the soil r is designated by n
instead of ir, and in the composition of vowel-con-
sonants a new sign (n) is used for the usual sign
(n-), thus: rrn, rd, Oun, p6y instead of art, and Qun,
Throughout the rest of the grammar the latter forms
only are used. After these pages had been struck off,
several other letters of the same fount were improved,
•as jy, ^, (57, sfi, ^, &c. tli
•^.
CONTENTS.
CHAPTER I.
{ PAOS.
1. General Statement, .... 1
2. The Tamil Letters, - .... 1
3. Division of Letters, .... 2
4. Names of do. - - - - - 4
5. Transmutation of do. - - - - 4
6. Omission of do. - - - - - 6
7. Augmentation of do. - - - - 7
8. Directions in regard to certain words, - - - 9
9. Directions in regard to Sanscrit words, - - 10
CHAPTER II.
10. Parts of Speech, - - - - - - 11
11. The Particles, . - - - - 11
12. Division and Subdivision of Nouns, - - - 15
1 3. Cases of Nouns, and Declension, - - - 16
34. The Oblique Case, - - - - 20
15. Pronouns, - - . - . - 21
16. Pronouns of the First Person, - - - - 21
1 7. Pronouns of the Second Person, - ♦ . . 23
1 8. Pronouns of the Third Person, - • - - 24
\0. Interrogative Pronouns, - - - - 28
20. Nouns of Number, - - - - - 30
21. Indefinite Pronouns, - - - - - 35
22. Formation of Nouns, - - - - - 36
via
CONTENTS.
23. Verba. Their Parts,
24^ Their Tenses,
25. Imperative Mood, ••
26. Optative Mood, -
27. Indefinite Moods, •
28. Verbal Nouns,
29. Negative Verb,
30. Paradigms of Verbs, -
31. Causal Verbs,
32. Defective Verbs,
33. Passive Voice,
34. Derivation and Formation of Verbs,
35. Adjectives,
Z6, Adverbs,
PAGE.
39
- 40
45
- 46
46
- 49
52
- 56
73
• 74
78
. 79
81
. 88
k
CHAPTEH 111,
37. General Statement, - - - - -
84
38. General Rules of Arrangement,
- 84
39. First Case, ------
86
40, Second Case, - - - - -
- 88
41. Third Case,
88
42. Fourth Cas«, - . - - -
. 90
43. Fifth Case,
93
44, Sixth Case, . - -
• 93
45. Seventh Case, - - - • -
95
46. Eighth Case, -----
. 96
47. Present Tense, - - • - •
96
48. Past Tense, -•-.--
. 97
49. Future Tense, - - • - -
»9
50. The First class of Indefinite Moods, or the Relative Par-
ticiples, - - - - - - 99
51. The Verbal Participle, or the First Indefinite Mood
of the second class, .... 102
CONTENTS.
IX
PAOK,
52. The Second, Thi«i, and Fottrtli Indefinite Moods of the
second class, - - - . . -JOS
is. The Fifth Indefinite Mood of the second chkss, or the
Infinitive, - - . • - 169
54. Analysis of Verbal Nouns, - - - - 1 J
55. Use of the Imperative and Optative Moods, - 124
66. Use of the Negative Verb, - . - -125
57. Use of the Passive Voice, • - * «. ]2q
58. The Verb cr«wfi/r)^,, * - « . -127
59. Compound Verbs, - - - • - 132
60. TheVerb^KJ/(5ifi/D^, • . - .133
«1. The Verb ^0;o^, - . - - 137
62. The Verb ^<ff(^ix), . • » - - I4l
63. TheVerbs^tffS'MBrtPi^, LMrtlCi^^n^ - • 142
64. The yefbsSi^^9^^>eo^ « . . . )43
65. The Verb ft.«r, 147
66. The Verbs (JLJ/r^i^ «^(?«w«ar, ^^y£^ , .148
67. Parts of the Verbs ^iJ^Qp^yQufr^Qfi^, . 1 49
68. The Pronouns, and the peculiar use of the Indefinite
Demonstrative Pronoun ®«w«Br, . . - 153
69. The Interrogative Pronouns, - - - 157
70. The Particle tJijL, . . . . .161
71. The Particles ^, fp, ^9 - • - . 162
72. The Partide «-"), - - . . .165
73. The Particles ^^jpi and ^^ar^ 0«rar^ x)r g)«r^£2^ ] 67
74. The Particles Qfi»f, tSisr, fitj, (?t£o), . . .169
75. The Particles Lo^(9t& or lo£1(9«^lo, flucoimi/^ or
mioofftiS^iL 0T^e8i£r^(^t}ij ufiiufi/gtl^ ^arojil^ 172
76. The Particles fJ^pp^ ^^JDi or uipjpuhj . - 1 73
77. The Particles S)^ oTfieSQiL^^ 83(»'<^1'9 «^<-9 #q9
ff and ^i^aJ, isjps^mpiu^ ^p^ (^ifi and ^i}p
CONTENTS.
PAOK.
JP and *fifiy ^(^^ and Qf^s^ mitSiUj ^fif^JHj
^&€Otr«^ tLu.tr 9b ^ .... 174
78. The Particles ^O J»^9 oyt^^uipLKJ/^^^iA, . 177
7». The Particle fiT^il), - - - - 379
80. The Particles is^trfifiunlj Jfwa/* #^, ^*w-, - 180
81. The Particles L^P^ and utr&y Quir(T$il.Q^ fiuSJf
;iLO, ^msujtr^ and ^0^fr^ and ^fBrut^oS
^(•«>, ^irm and >i/ril), Qjftrjfuly - - 181
82. 6r^€VflrL£, jB««)(ipLC, ^'^igafi^Ui, Slc, - - 185
83. Arrangement of Certaia Clauses, - - - ^86
84. Arrangement of Words, - - - - 190
APPENDIX.
1. Divisions of Time, - - - - 193
2. Points of the Compass, - - - - 195
3. Terms of Relationship, - - - - 196
4. Hindoo Cycle, and Ages, - - - - 201
ABRIDGMENT OF TAMIL GRAMMAR.
CHAPTER I.
ORTHOGRAPHT.
SECTION I.
Tamil Orthography treats of the Form, Names, Sound,
Number, Division, Transmutation, Omission, and Aug-
mentation of letters.
SECTION II.
The Tamil language has thirty simple letters, viz.
twelve vowels and eighteen consonants ;
o)
Five Short Vowds,
^ a, as in America. ot 5, "as in self.
Q T, as in still. cp o, as in no.
tL u, as in full.
Seven Lmg Voweb,
Jg, a, as in father. © y, as in eye.
ff ee, as in ree)* ^ 6, as in sole.
esc ii, as in fule. eperr oQ, as in foul.
€7 #y, as in they.
A
2 ORTHOGRAPHY.
Eighteen Consonants,
s k, in the beginning, gut- u p and b.
tural in the middle of a id m.
word. (u y, as ijQ yes«
® ng. . fT r, soft. ;^ j^
^ s. ^ ' eo I, soft.
L- d, hard. fP rl.
€Sor n, hard. err 1, hard.
^, like a soft th. jp r, hard. '
fB n. «or n, soft.
iVble 1. Consonants without the form of a vowel
have the short vowel si a, inherent, as : a ka, iSf sa.
But a dot placed over a consonant shows that it is
mute, as : accsr kan, eye.
Note 2. Besides these^. consonants, two from the
Sanscrit are in use, viz. 6^ sh, and ero s.
SECTION III.
The Tamil Grammarians have divided the eighteen
consonants —
1. Into six hard sounding letters, euio^eisr ^t£0§i»
Sf ^, L., ^, L/, flO.
2. Into six soft sounding letters, QineoeSem <oJi§f§i,
IB, Q, €60r, IS, to, 6or.
3. Into middle letters, QeeiUi^esr crt^^^i, a/, a, so,
^, ip, er*
.J
A
OKTHOGRAPHr.
The vowels when subjoined to consonants leave
their initial form and appear as in the following table.
e-
g
1
%
*
o
©
IS)
g
^
C9
.1^
C9
s
1
C9
1
C9
a
C9
C9
g
^
1
es
S
e
1
S
ej
e
d
1
^
1
§
O
9
1
1
1^
e:
§
1
6-
1
1
1
o
i)
I
S)
C9
1
1
1
i
C9
■s
J
(3
C9
<ri
s
16
C3
IS)
J
1
•a
IS
3
9'
a
t:
1
9\
9.
1
i
18
3
J
C3
-*•
§
3
e?
a
3
C3
1
1
^
g
o
1^
C9
H)
O
&
o
i
1
(§
a
1
3
C9
C9
1
(f
§
o
«
0)
I6>
g
<s
1
g
g
dd
%
3D
tsd
%
aD
9»
i)& 1
w
^
F
«
9i
©
1
%
@i
3"
%)
3"
lo
a
S-
93
S)
3)
@l
t
«I6
•e
%
«© ^
1
•*
•e
•3
•9
^
«!=•
•8
'S
•9S
"S
•a
*§
«t
ci8
*5
%
*©
^
1
««i
MS
«a
«9
*g
c
•8
•8
•9s
•fe
«s:
*§
*
S
1
i
5
i)
J
D
Si
3
1
3
b
1
1
9S
«
g
Q
®
^
16
a
H»
J
j_
«.
IS
3
9
3
fc
?
3
9S
g
a
§
,\
^
/
4 ORTH06RAPHT.
SECTION IV.
1. To express the names of the letters, ndf is added
to every short letter, and vena or ySnd to the long,a s :
^ anH, s kana, ^ dvencl, sn kdv^^nct. The classical
appellation is, snthy gurdmy added to short letters; and
&nfTth, gardm, to long vowels, as: si, Si&rrih; s, asnihy
^, ^sarrih. Long consonants are thus expressed, ah,
asneunanmh; ^, s'srr^snmh, &c.
2. A letter is called €rLg^§!'y a vowel, s.uSOrTi^0§i,
letter of life; a consonant, QiDdjQajt^^§f, letter of body;
a vowel consonant, &.t}SfrQLDdiQ{Uig0§i, letter of body
and life; a short vowel is called ^p&t6Qrri£0§i, and a
long vowel QiBC(BiiSQrTi£^§i.
SECTION V.
1. The pronunciation of a long vowel or double
consonant requires twice the time necessary for a short
vowel or single consonant. /
2. Every long vowel and every compound syllable,
t. e. a syllable composed of two consonants and one
Towel, have a particular emphasis or accent; besides
this there is no accent in Tamil.
SECTiAk VI.
Transmutation, ^/f^o), of letters takes place when
two words are joined together, as :
/
TRANSMUTATION. 6
^ 1. When the preceding word ends in a mute conso-
nant and the next begins with a vowel, that vowel is
dropped, and its characteristic mark is joined to the
mute consonant, thus: ^oj&sr ^iosuso — siojsi^eoeuso, '
Ac is not; G^nuu> ^ehen — (J«/iU(ipCTr6rr, angry, ^"-^'tv^^^/j^
V/^ 2. Some words ending in s., when they are united
as adjectives, with some other words, change the &. into
gg, namely, ^6csr(B, a year; ue&r®, ancient; ^cfcrgji, for-
mer time; @63r©f, present day; U)^&y other; become
uem&sii^ssnedih, ancient time, Sfc.
3. The letters tb, eo, etr, esstj 6£t, change thus :
* ih before « is changed into fsa.
*£b'- - *, - - - ^^.
* to - - ^ - - ihff,
*«) - • B - - - ^<S.
* eo - - ^ - - |i)<F.
eo - - ^ r - ^{p or {p.
But when a monosyllable ending in go, precedes ^,
«o^ are changed into oojp.
When a short monosyllable ending in eo, precedes m,
€0/E are changed into ^esr.
€0 before m is changed into ebriD,
«r - - a - - iltf.
«r - - - ^ - . - L4F.
dr - - u - - tlu.
ch- - -^ - - - iIl. or u.
But when a monosyllable ending in etr, precedes ^,
err^ are changed to S>l^*
6 ORTHOGRAPHY.
When a short monosyllable ending in «r, precedes »,
enfB are changed into oSsr^sor.
OT before id is changed into c&sru>.
Gfer - - ff - - tltf.
6fer - - - ^ - - - il^.
^ - - u - - ilu.
6^ - - • ^ - - - €ferL-.
But when a word ending in eisf, which, though nomin-
ative in form, is to be construed in the oblique case,
precedes ^, cSor^ are changed into iIl..
When a short monosyllable ending in c&sr, precedes
n», €&7/6 are changed into e&sr^ssr.
dsf before « is changed into pB.
6&r - - ^ - - • ^£p
fiSr - • u - - pu,
6&r - - ^ - - - 62(r/p.
But when a word ending ip dsr, which, though nomin-
ative in form, is to be construed in the oblique case,
precedes p, €brp are changed intp prp.
When a short monosyllable ending in «&r, precedes a,
€fgrtB are changed into 6ir€OT.
.SECTION VII.
The amiisian, QsQ^eo, of letters takes place :
1. With the exception of words containing two
short syllables, such as ct^, ua, d^^c, all words ending
in £., drop this vowel when another vowel follows,
thus: G^eif^v Si^^i, is written Qfdfeufr^, ekarness k
AUGMENTATION. 7
difficult; ^(B Brh§i — ^&5)Ufk§i, five sheep; €uibSf @(^i
d(r)6lsr^-'6uih^Qid(r)6crj he is come,
2. When polysyllabics and long monosyllables end-
ing in
«&jr precede m the two letters become €ccr.
io " " ih - - - gur,
dr- - ih " -" - GRsr.
l/^ When a short monosyllable ending in ih, precedes
m, the ih is changed to fh, thus; Oojih and /fir be-
come Qeufbi^h, hot water; Q^ib and QiBio, become
Q^fBQmio, red paddy.
Note, The changes mentioned in section vi. 1;
such as are marked with an asterisk [*] in vi. 3;
and VII. 2; together with the changes specified in
section vii. 1, are cpainlo^jy observed in Tamil prose
writings.
SECTION VIII.
The augmentation, iSaeo, of letters takes place:
^ 1. When a word ending in^^, <9t, s., esir, 6j>, g^,
or 6p6rr, is followed by a word beginning with any
vowel, the letter o; is inserted between both. All
words ending in s. that are not words of two short
syllables are exceptions and drop the &., and take the
next vowel as mentioned before in section vii. par-
8 ORTHOGRAPHT.
agraph 1. ^eoe^ ei^rr)^ — ^coeoGojeirnjfi&r, he iM
no> fyc*, s\& and @^ may follow either rule, as: ^§f
.. Q^^9Sf or s\Q§^€Si9 what is that,
1/ 2. When a word ending in ®, af, ^, or $5, is
followed by another word beginning with a vowel,
iL is inserted, as: ^ <§ti9-^a?' — ^luni^^^, the fire bla-
zed, §'C.
^ 3. When a short monosyllabic word, ending in a
consonant, n and fp excepted, is followed by a rowel,
the consonant is doubled, as: scfer Sj,€Si^ — «€S?y@)
6Q><7, the lust of the eye, 8fc,
4. The four letters s, iF, ^, u, are doubled,
^ (1.) When the preceding word ends in «9/, in these
« instances: after the infinitive mood, after the inde-
clinable pronouns, ,9//e^, that, @ib^, this, crfb^, which;
after Gu/i60, like, iD^tp, other, s{^so, no, and after some
nouns which have dropped the last letter u), and end
therefore in ^, as: 6Li/T#0,g=n65r^6sr, Ae told to come;
\LnsQsn\hi\, branch of a tree, S^c.
(2.) After every long vowel, as: i£un0psiTrB^§i, the
pot broke; PFffQ>SF^^§i, the fly died, ^c,
(fi, thou, the third person plural neuter of the nega-
tive verb, ^€5)61/, they, (the things), and some words
derived from Sanscrit are excepted from this rule.
(3.) After the verbal participle, terminating in ®,
after @6of, ^6of, ®uu\s^, ^tl/uip., ctuu($l, and after most
nouns ending in ®, and standing in the oblique case,
as: Qmjiitp^QiFfi^^dsf, praising he said; ^ee^^Q^dj
Cfiue&r, hereafter I will do} S\^$uQi^\h, a fig, Sfc,
▲VGMBIfTATlOIf. 9
/ (4.) After words ending in «l, that have their last
consonant double, which include many verbal participles
and the dative case, as: ojvS^&AaCBCii^, pain in the
stomach; ^esit^^gj^f^mpn^, he called and gave; ineuso
^^uCoun, go to the "mountainy S^c. ; after words of two
short syllables, excepting S{^t ®§i, ^§ii and ^q, ^5,
as : Gun§i&Q^niOj a common word; after words ending
in ilq, il^, p0, as: (BtLniiQsn€isfL.tt^, he became
friendly; and after nouns ending in &. and standing in
the oblique case, as: LfnLDquui.{2), the head of a cobra,
8fc.
(5.) After the second or accusative case, after @^
€i£0, and some nouns ending in gs, when standing in the
oblique case, and after some nouns when united with
verbs to form other verbs, as: ^eiSi^SiaecsfQueisr, I
saw it; <^€Q)iFUUL.i.n/T£eiT, they desired, S^c,
(6.) After the verbal participles Gum, and «%iu, and
after some nouns ending in lu, /r, or lq, and stand-
ing adjectively, as: GLiniu#G*<F/i69r@)6sr, he went and
said; Gundjs^Q^ioeuib, false riches, ^c,
SECTION IX.
1. When #61), some, and ueo, many, are vn'ittcn
twice, they denote variety, diS: ^60^eo,some; U€OU€0,
several.
2. The word Gp^, honey, may be united with other
words without any change, as: Gp^at!^§i, the honey
is thick,
3. The words smdsr, marrow, and ^u5drr, a cloud,
iO ORTHOGRAPHT.
are never changed, as: eQE«b'S(t6S}tD, the hardnea of
the marrow; ^vS^^L^m, a coUection of douds, ifc.
4. When two Sanscrit words are united they often
follow the Sanscrit mle. Thus, if a final s\ is fol«
lowed by an initial s\ or <^, the two vowels coalesce
into ^f as: Qeuf ^awib — (^cu^nsLDU); a book of the
Ved; if by S or ff, into «7 ; if by £., into ^, as :
^p SA>§i — ^Opik§i, the cold moon; mfp^^psib — ^f
Opti^aibf dear water*
CTTM0L06T. 11
v/
CHAPTER 11.
CTTlIOIaOGT.
SECTION X.
(See large Grammar § IL)
The Tamil Grammarians divide all the words of their
language into four principal parts, viz. Nouns, Verbs,
Particles, and Adjectives. They have no article ; the
pronoun is included in the noun; the preposition,
conjunction and interjection in the particle, and the
adverb, in the adjective.
SECTION XI.
(G. § 12.)
The particles, ®€SiU^Q^nn)sefr, middle wordst are
connected with other words and have no meaning in
themselves. They are divided into eight classes.
1. The first class, (Uu$>&esitDt{\^i\aefT, fofms of de-
clermon, (see the paradigm of the noun.)
2. The second class, eSoearim^qs^, forms of the
verb, (see the paradigm of the verb.)
3. The thu'd class, seventeen in number, are such as
are used to connect the forms of declension and conju-
gation with the roots, and are called ^ti/f€9>\u, viz. si^,
12 ETTMOLOGT.
^^, @eor, ^€0, M?>&y ®?>&y ^t&i <W^> ^^> ^^* &^^
€7, Mi «-, ffi, ©, «Jr-
4. The fourth class, are called 9L.euG5HD6^0^npsGiT,
particles of similarity or comparison, signifying : as, like
05, equal to, according to. They are : Guneo, epuu, Gmn,
i^srT, U19., nsfSifTiu, @ei5i\uiu, sQOu, tunem, ^djdu, ^^GSf,
@6sr€or>
The nouns with which these are connected may be
in the nominative or accusative case.
But u(f. takes @^, one of the third class particlea,
before it, as: ^f^uu^, according to that,
^uu, OiBu, Harr receive also the adverbial form in
^tu, as: €puuB\b, Qmnadj, tS&rrndj, like or near, and re-
quire the dative case, as : MpiY)Qanuuadj, Uke that, 8f€,
The first five only of this class are used in common
language.
5. The fifth class, ^^^wOunr^Qsrr&sniLt^aj ®6q>c*#
Q^n^SGiT, are particles which in different connexions
have different meanings, they are: 9, e^, £.a>, ciesf,
crdsripi, dp^, debr, &^, Omeo, idiLQ, iDfip, S^, <%&$i
JJ|, 4()> @, CT, ••> €T6&r/jr), erdsr^, €p(S, ^eo, iD€(sr, Qsb4o,
Q^n^ih, G^n^U), ^^ih, Sj^^tb, &c.
Many of these are used only in poetry; those used
in common life are the fi^owing: cr, 9, ^»^^t cr^or,
€r^&, (jp^, d6&r, &y^, Qmeo, idlLQ, u>pfst, u>p^, dcsf,
Q^npih, MrsQ^n, &Qujn, ^^ih, J^@iih,
Of these ^, $>, and <%, are the empkatict diajuneti^e,
and interrogalhe particles.
■/
ETYMOLOGT. 13
&.U) is mostly conjunctive, and means andf, abo;
sometimes it is disjunctive and means even, than; eresr,
crdsriff are conjunctions, and mean that; sometimes^
like, as.
(tp65r, or (fpfiSrq, or (tp^esrOm means before; it is also
used absolutely as a conjunction of time, meaning
formerly.
iSeSr, or tSecTLj, or iSesrgw/r means after, behind, both
as to time and space; &tj^, under, beneath; Qidso, above,
over J iDiLQ, or iDiLQib, until, as far as; ixi^^ and lo/p
(pu), othervnse, are used adverbially; iD^ff), other, is
used adjectively; ^'6of, or (^edQineo, hereafter, is used
absolutely; Q^ni^ih, (G^^ngi'ii) in poetry) every one;
^ihO^n and ^Qiuti are interjections, and mean oh!
alas! ^iJ^ih and ^^ih mean even if, at least, although,
either, or.
6. Besides these many words, though belonging to
other parts of speech, are used as prepositions or con-
junctions, Tiz.
(1.) Infinitives of verbs: OiC, together, from StXB^tp
^, to join; SlLu, near, from diLQS^§j, to approach;
f,€Sa, except, from ^^^r^Stp^, to separate; €p\$[u, except,
from €pifSfp§i, to cease; ^rp&^GSirpiu, about, nearly
more or less, from ^^drp§i, to ascend, increase, and
^esiroSro§i, to lessen; ^rp, off, from, without, from ^{pi
£p§i, to cease, to be cut off; ^ip, round about, from 0tg
fp&i to surround,
if (2.) Verbal participles : ^(|S^^, witli the accusative,
means concerning, about, from ^^^&^^, to define, point
a2
14 ETYMOLOGY.
out; @eoeontDio, and ^^(j^, with the nominative, without,
from the irregular negative verb @€i)j ^iceoniDiOj and
Sl^f^i with any case, besides, except, from the irregular
negative Verb ^io^ ^ipifeg;, from ^Lg^^§i, and ^/DgS,
from mprQiStp§i, with the accusative, around j eSiLQ,
vith the accusative, from, from eSQ£cp§i, to leave.
(3.) Subjunctive n^oods: ©^^oneStlL-no), t/ not, tm-
fe5, from @60 and eSQ^gll^^^eo, if, from ^^fp§/,
to become-j ^S^ib and <^@)3^u), even if although, yet,
from ^drp§i.
(4.) Nouns: uiftore^w, with the nominative, until;
iuesifTuSeo, the ablative, and euesiirs^ih, the dative of
QjssifT, until; ^eyro/ib, un/i'Z, from <$|6Yr6i/, measure; u)n^
^/rd), only; iDr^iEi^, the side, hip, with the genitive, near;
'Guni^§i, time, @uGu!]t£§!, this time, now, ^uGuni£§i,
that time, then, eTuQuni£§i, which time? when? ui^,
Vig^sQ, manner, measure, in order to, that; fiiB^^ib,
a. sign, omen, for the sake of; s.L-6or, s.i.G6or, imme-
^atehf; ^€S)SULjn€0, ablative of the verbal noun ^60)s,
being, therefore, wherefore,
7. ^esiS^iEesip&Sn) @6S)L.5=G^n/f)S€Tr, emphatic, or ex-
pletive particles; of these @r^fh§i, @l.(J, pnib, ^nesr,
S^tsTfsi and ^ih, only are used in common language.
Moreover, J^esroj^, ct^uqj^, ^€m§i, ^QJ§i are
affixed to nouns, and CTGsru§t is affixed to nouns and
sentences.
There are many more belonging to this class, but
they are not used in common language.
J
NOUNS. 15
SECTION XII.
(G. § 13 to § 16.)
Nouns*
The noMfW, QurrffQa^neo, are divided principally into,
(1.) ^fpCinuQurr, specific 'n&unSfdis: ^n^^eky Saitiinj mn
iDfTthy mango tree, 6fc. (2.)- Gun§iuQufr, generic nouns,
as: u>6of^6dr, man, tLrrth, a tree, S^c, The nouns are
further divided into, (1.) s^ojif^fijsssr , high caste, includ-
ing words that signify God, men, and spirits, male or fe-
male; and (2.) sioofj^Q/sssr , no caste, including all other
nouns. These two classes are again divided into five
smaller ones, called uneo, part, which include our gen-
ders and numbers; these are,
Sj^e&Nuni)!), masculine high caste,
Gu6Sor Li/160, feminine high caste,
ueofrunio, common high caste,
cp&sripasrunio, singular of no caste,
ueoeSesrunio, plural of no ca^ste*
1. ^emuneo, mascuUne high caste, includes all nouns
of the male sex of the class o-iufr^osm, in the singular
number, as : ^6L/6sr, iDsecr, l\qu^, &c.
2. Qu€6i^ui\io, feminine high caste, includes all nouns
of the female sex of the ^iuiT^€iessf, in the singular
number, as: ^eu&r, iDaerr, crO^/f, &c.
3. U€Ofrunio, common high caste, comprehends the
plural of the masculine nouns, as: Lj0L./t; the plural
/
16 ETYMOLOGY.
of the feminine nouns, as: (?U6Csrs6Tr; and the plural
common to both, as: ^Q;/T£6rr, &c.
4. ^6srrr)6&run^, singular no caste, includes all nouns
of ^oofj^oem, in the singular number, as: GS(Bf &^$y
mndj, &,c,
5. ueDGS&ffuneOj plural no caste, includes all nouns of
^oo^QissN, in the plural number, as : cSQs&Tj &/C.
Note. The plural is formed by adding setr to the
singular, as: Quem, ©usscrssrr; nouns of the s-tun"
^Qjsm class ending in 6&r, change cot to /r, to form
the plural, to which s&r may be added, as: L|(5i-6&r, Lf(5
t_n", q(5L-/t«6rr, and some of them take iDnfr between the
singular and plural terminations, as: ^suugst, father,
^<siJueOTU)/i/T^6Yr, fathers.
SECTION XIII.
(G. § 16.)
In declining the noun, the Tamulians have eight
cases, called Qoj^gpiesiiDiLii^nseiT, forms of changes.
1. The first case, CTt^eum, or SQ^§n, the beginning,
the first, is our nominative. The noun itself appears
in this case without addition, as: u)6sf^6zn-, a man,
seoed, science, Qmeij, pain, cSio, a bow, S^c.
2. The second case, ^Qeufp^esiio, adds only ss to
the nominative, as: iDst^^oesr, the man, a^oeS&snu, (Sua
&SiQj, eSeOeiso, &c. It is our accusative.
3. The third case is our ablative and is, (l.) instru-
NOUNS. 17
mental, by adding to the nominative ^io, as: i£)&^^
@)eo, by the man, seoeSiundi), &/C.; and (2.) social, by
adding ^Q or s.u(Sgst, as: iDed^pQ^Q, tDet^^^i^Qesr,
with the man; GmnGeunQ, d&c.
4. The fourth case adds @, s^ or sl^^, and is our
dative, as: u>6qP^^^^, to the man, sid^iQ, QiEneif
^0; eSeo^i^, U)6uf^/T^^, to men.
5. The fiflh case is an ablative of separation, or motion,
and adds @Q) or @6ot, as: wet^pst^eo, from the man,
&€0e2\j5e0, dtc. ; very often the particle @{5/fe§/ or /^eorg?/
is added to this case, as: iDcdfed^^r^fh^, iDcd^pei^
6. The sixth case is our genitive, and adds si& or
e.6S)[_uj, as: LD€t^^€sr§i or u)€S^^^€SiL.iu, of the man,
Sfc. Neuter nouns, particularly such as end in a vowel,
take @6cr before this termination, as: «eo«5u5g}/65)i_uj,
€ie06SuS€i5r§i, &c. The termination is sometimes drop-
ped thus: s€06Si6^, GnneS^,
7. The seventh case is an ablative of place, and is ex-
pressed in poetry by 28 terminations; but in common
Tamil only @60, ^t^^^eo are in use, as: u)6sf^6cf60,
Ui€t^^€i^t-^^id, at or in the man, £fc.
8. The eighth case called eSefiGoj^&esiiD, mode of
caUing, is our vocative, and adds ^ to the nominative,
as: iDe^pGsisr, iDnessfGu), Oman! O death f SfC,
Nouns ending in @, may change the short vowel
@ into the long vowel ff, as: ihibtS, niihi3, O Lord!
Words ending in 6or, sometimes drop the 6cr, to
18 ETYMOLOGY.
form the eighth case, as: @£onr)fiL/6sr, ^stsipoj, King!
or lengthen the last vowel, as: Gur^U)^, Qur^iDn^,
O thou great one ! or drop the <9/6cr and add Sf^^ Sj^Qeun,
or ^, as: ^esifpeu&sr, @es>p€un, O King! ^inoj&ff, ^tu
iunOeun, Osir! ggojeSr, gsCiu, sir!
Note 1. The ^n/fewiu, il'e&r and ^eor may be in-
serted before the termination of any case excepting
the vocative. Particularly in nouns that do not end
in 6cr, as: seoeS, second case, aioeSaSeussTf &c. The
dative may therefore take @@y«^, or @fr)g, or ^rf)^,
as: S{$^^i OT^^jpQj to that.
Note 2. In forming the cases the common rules
of changes and augmentation of letters are observed :
for a606S€S)iu, see § vm. 2. Gmn&sieu, see § vii. 1.
€f)60€i£\), see § VIII. 3.
Paradigm of the Nc^un.
V
Singular, V
1. Nom. f£)6of«6§r, a man, 0^^/; i ?"
2. Ace. u)69f^6iiS8r, a man,
\ *\i 3. Abl. instr. mei^^^io, by a man.
<-
'\..
v^ -- ^
^ . n f^^Abi: soc. ^ ">«^^^®(^. ^^ \ ^ith a man.
xr T "*: ^^^* ffieof^gy^^, <o a man, J
' o.^bl. mot. ^ ' ^ \ji
rom a man.
"-^^^m
r
trt^rfid>utiu' NOUNS. 19
^tSf>L.LU6. Gen. u>€(^p^es>t-uj, id6i^^€^§i, of a man. ^^^
A^ 8. Voc. iD6of^<?€cr, O man/ ^^
P/wra/.
1. Nom. u)6of^/t or m6of^/t«6VT, men,
2. Ace. /Desf^ewn- or iDei^pnaeiefT, men.
3. AbL instr. u)«jP^n'fleo .or fi)6^^/T<S6Yrna), ^y men.
Abl. soc. \ "'«^^«'^"® or "-^f I ^/A men.
4. Dat. [">«^?t5*S or msBf^irag > ^^ ^^_
C or u>6i^^hsfr^&Q, >
( ioeef ^^ic or loeof^ira "t
5. Abl. mot. J ^^>J>f§J^ff. \j,^ ^,
(^ Ii)60f^/rS61lf60f6&rgl/, J
6. Gen. J '^«»f^!5«»'-'" or wedf^nsi^ ? ^y: „e„,
7 Abl lor ^ tD6^^^i^^^io or £/36Bf^n" ^ of or in
( se^i^^^edf £D6of^/T«€irf60, J men.
8. Voc. LDsi^ftGrr or fDeuf^/t^Gerr, O men/
All nouns are declined like iDeof^esr with the follow-
ing exceptions.
1. Nouns ending in siu>, drop this syllable in the
singular and add the ^n/res)iu, si^§i before the termin*
ations, excepting the vocative, as : ^^ ^, . < 5—
1. iDfiih, a tree, ^
2. LDcr^esi^ or LDfr^^eisar, a tree, .
20 ETYMOLOGY.
3. iDfr^^nio or iDn^^^io, by a tree.
iDfT^G^nQ or iDrr^^Q^Q, with a tree.
4. ii)/T^g/«4§ or iDfT^^^^f to a tree.
5. iDn^$eo or iDn^^sd^eo, from a tree.
6. a)/T^^gy65)t_uj, of a tree,
7. iDFT^^ei^L.^^GO, at or m a tree.
8. tLrrGiD, O tree!
The Plural is tDn-iHserr, &c. ft
2. Nouns ending in Q and gii preceded only by one
syllable with a long vowel, or preceded by more than
one syllable with short vowels, have the l1 and rb doubled
before they receive the terminations, excepting the voca-
tive case and the plural number, as :
l^rj Vc^t,^ eSQ, kousef eSCeoW, ^iLu.neo, &c.
^lii p.^^- ^&> river, ^;D6onp, <%p(r)Q}, &c.
i iC ^£(S, aflat metal plate, ^aileoL., &,c.
THE OBLIQUE CASE.
Besides the eight cases already mentioned there is a
case, called the general oblique case. It is used either
as the 6th or as the 7th case. It is variously formed.
One form of it is made by adding the «F/»f60UJ, @^r, as:
/i^- ii i qeoeSe&rewgJSjrsscrib, the coUmr of the grass.
%(i\ ^'iif eijnsdiu^^^QunQ&rj the substance of a verse.
Nouns ending in siu>, may be formed in it by chang-
ing ^ih to ^^§1, as: (jps^§ii^^!\fU€0, the likeness of the
face.
Some nouns ending in ^ti), drop the (i merely, as :
iDGSTGrnneif, distress of mind.
PRONOUNS. 21
Nouns ending in a vowel receive no change, as:
^QSdQmn^, head ache, or the ache of the head.
Nouns ending in Q and gj/, (of the description men-
tioned above) double these consonants to form it, as:
aniLQeui^i the forest road ; 6uu3n)^'6U6S, pain of or in the
belly.
The nominative is sometimes used for this oblique
case, as: unn)BL^GO, the sea of milk.
SECTION XIV.
(G. § 17.)
Pronouns*
The Tamulians class the pronouns with the nouns.
They are divided into p^et^wuQuife^Q^nGi) , nouns re-
ferring to ourselves^ (ipefsrei^osouQufrs^Qs'neOf nouns refer-
ring to persons standing before us; UL^fr&eGiSuQuirs^
Gs'nei), nouns referring to persons or things at a dis-
tance; QS@)Li(3u/t#(?d=/i60, nouns of interrogation; and
CTGSerezrafesrCJu/Ta^G'iS^/ieo, nouns of number,
' What we denominate "person" the Tamulians call
@L.i£>, placef and thus the first person is called ^6^6S)lo
[i5i^ib, the second (tp6^6of6LS);u5L.u>, and the third ULjra
SECTION XV.
(G. § 18.)
The 6565r65)U)(i5L-^§/iI/CJu/T#(?*/i50, loords of the first
22 ETYMOLOGT.
person, are nnGsr, I, in the singular; and mtith and mia
s&T, we, in the plural. They are thus declined:
Singular.
1. /R/I65r, /. /WCkTfV
2. eiGsreusar, me. I
3. eJGsr^io, by me.
erssrO^Q, with me. * .
-y 4. €T6OTife^, /o me. ^- '"
^* J . _^^^ . > /romwe.
C C7 651601 60r65rgjf, J "^
6. €T6&r, eT€i5T§i, €Tdsf^€SiL.iu, of me.
7. GT6sr6ofL.^^^; ei&srei^GO, in or a^ m€.
Plural.
1. /Rfizi or flBn/!i;«€Tr, we. f^' ' tu ^ :v. v. juC^
2. /Bii)65)U) or CTiBSQerT, us.
3. fhthiDnio or CT/aasir/ieo, 6j^ u«.
ihihQiDnQ or CT/BtS^err/iCS, tri/A ««•
4. mmAQ or ct/ej^ct^^^, /o.u9.
r/Eii)(fa) or er&ise^io, tf)ihi£6Sr^fh§j,'\
5. s or ^iBseffeSQih^ij^fniiSedi'^ij^ or r/i-omt».
I 67JE/«eif60f65rgV, J
( /fill) or ciEisefT, ihinsi or GT/E/fierrs') ) r
6. J . . > q/««-
( tBiD(ip&5)i^iu or ct/e;«^€Q)l.uj. 5
7 < . « o ^'^ ' > in or af i«.
^ aiDLoio or CT/E/«6Yr60. >
It is of great importance to bear in mind that ihnih
includes yourself and the person or persons to whom
you speak, but maiEis^ excludes the latter.
PRONOUNS. 23
SECTION XVI.
(G. §. 19.)
The (Lpdsr&^QSou5L^^§iijQuni^Gs^{\€0f words of the se-
cond person, 2Lre: iS, thou, in the singular; and /f/ETAGrr,
you, in the phiraL They are thus declined :
Si/^uktn
1. i^, thou.
2. &.^Qi68r, thee.
3. £.68r@)eo, by thee.
s.€^Q^(Sy with thee.
4. ^Gsr&^f to thee.
^- i «if«Df6Srgy. I from thee.
6. SL65r, £.€w^, a-fiSrgyeouiLf, of thee.
1. SL6!fr6ofL-^^60, 2-65r6of Q), ttt or at thee.
1. i^fBsefT, yow.
2. 2./E/£Q£Tr, yOtf.
3. ^.msenneOy by you.
£./Bi<£5(?6m?(^, im/^ you.
4. e.(E/<B^^^, to you.
5. < c^ tr' jrom you.
6. ^ms&T, 9L&jS€tT§i, &.iEis^€SiL.iu, of you.
1. &.iBS€^L~.^^60, s,iB&e^io, in or at you.
1^ IB sen, besides being used simply as a plural, is
u
24 ETYMOLOGY.
also applied to a single person, as an honorific by in-
feriors to superiors. When equals address each other
politely they use /f /t, which is thus declined :
1 . i^iTy thou or you. ^flT
2. ^ihesiLD, thee or you.
3. SLihiDneo, by thee or you,
&.thOLDn(Bj with thee or you.
4. s.LDS^j to thee or you.
5. < ' yj f^' \ jrom thee or you.
6. snD§i, s>ii)(<p65)HL/, of thee or you,
7. s^ibiSi^^^iOf s-ibSiOy in or at thee, or you.
SECTION XVII.
(G. § 20.) J .
1. The UL^ffSieis)&uQuiTSFQs'ii6d, nouns refeMng to the
persons or things of which we speaks are masculine, femi-
nine and neuter. They are the same as the demonstra-
tive pronouns, called in Tamil «l1@iI/(5u/t, and are of
two sorts; the one pointing out the remote person or
thmgy and the other that which is near to us. They are
formed of the demonstrative letters si and @ with the
terminations ^esr, ^err, and §i, thus : ; ,-» ~
^eueisr, he or that man] @6u^f he or this man,
^Qj€fT, she or that woman; ^cuetr, she or this woman*
^§jj it or that thing '^ @§i, it or this thing.
2. The masculine and feminine of these pronouns
are declined like cceof^ssr, thus:
PRONOUNS. 25
Singular.
1. StaifSsr, ^€U€Ssr, he; ^eu&r, Sqj&t, she.
2. Si^oar, ^euoeoTf him; ^qjoot, @QjQ£fT, her, 6lc.
Plural.
1. ^feufir or sieuffs&T, those '^ ®€un or Qeufraetr, these
men or women.
2. ^€iies>fr or sieurraoerr, those; Qsueeirr or ^ojfr&eiBrT,
these m£n or womeuj SfC.
^euffserr, commonly used as the plural.
^€ufr commonly and sisufrs&rf sometinjes applied as
honorifics to single persons.
3. The neuter pronoun is thus declined :
Singular.
1. j)/gf, that. ^^; ^^^ @§}, this.
2. ^etsip, or sipeusar, that. @es)p or i^^aear^ this.
». ^$^io, or ) . ^^^ ^$^eo or ) ^ ^^^^
^#(J^® or > ^^^ ^j^^ ®0Q^(i or > ^^ ^j^^
4. ^g/A^ or ^ ®^<4^ or
Sifijb§ or > to that. @$$)&
& or \
bQ or > to ihvi.
5. s\$€0 or <9/^
«of ^ or ^^6sf
A) or ^^fioffi^
@^ea or ^^^
/rom «jF^ or @« I - v.
/Aa^. coreo or ^^
^f^fh^i 6&C.
A3
26 ETYMOLOGY.
6. ^f^vOUiu ^ Q^^&sii^iu or
or ^0^ or [ "/ '*«'• or @#6Sr or "-f"^-
7. ^^€i^L.^^&)f } at or in @^6ofL-^^eo, ^ a^ or in
^^eo, ) that, @^€0, ) this.
' ' 1. «9|6S)6i;, or ^6Q)a/a6rr, those,
2. sji€un)€SiPO, or ^69)62; A Q£rr, fAoife.
V'vi.ts. ^fiL/;D(5€0, or siesiQjsennio, or ,$/6L;;i) > w ..
fi6Ufp(S(r)(B, or ,5|6«)6w«(?G!Tn®, or ^©j^ > ^.^^ ^^^^^^
g5C@)(8, or ^^euae^Q^Q, >
4. <9/€;L;^svd^^, or ^€S)€userT^SQ, or Si€urb(p^Q, to those.
5. ^€iipfpeiX, or ^69)£UiSS6Yf6D, <9/6u^gS6)S5/E^, ^ /rom
or ^6Q)QJ£6Tf6^5/B§/, Or ^6Uir)fp€^€0j J those,
6. ^€ijptfi^€SiUiUj or ^eofiL/sgrjeot-uj, > ^/#a^
7. j^Gupfii^u^^io, or ^es)€use^ei^L^^^io ) at or tn
dffiL/^gSeo, or ,9/60)6i/«6TfQ), 5 ^^o^e.
@tfO>Q; or &€si€ijsen declined in the same way.
Note. siQJ^esiff) and ^ojtpGSip are formed of the
letters si and @, of ^^& one of the ^n/f€Si\u, and of
the terminations.
4- The demonstrative letters ^ and ^ may also be
prefixed to nouns of any number, gender or case. If the
noun begins with a consonant, the consonant is double-
rnoNouNS. 27
ed ; if it begins with a vowel, double qj comes between
tbe prefix and the initial vowel of the noun, as :
^ibu>6f^^^, that man; Quiu>S(^ji^, this man,
^eueuaeoiutb, that temple; ^ojenneoajtb, this temple. ^
^*^^^?^Tnbe two demonstrative pronouns ^/fe^ and ®ik^
{siCaCjOuQrT^^ih) defective demonstratvoe nounSj are
prefixed as adjectives to any noun, as: ^hpuiosOt thai
mountain; ®mpuLi^aih, this side. They can never be
used by themselves.
6. Another form of indefinite demonstrative pronouns
is ^ebfGsr, @6sr6cr, sitch. They form nouns by affixing!^ '£^4.
I the usual personal terminations and are declined, as: ^ ''^^'^^
-H"*^ ^esr^^iT, such a man ; @6&r@)6!jr, such a man ; ^6Sr@)6iT, . •. ^
* such a woman; ^^^ea^ such a woman; ^dsr€cr§i,^^-^^t
5ttc^ a thing; ^^6Si§!, such a thing,
@^€(5r is used adjectively, as; SesresrzDeof^e&r, such
a man; ^GsrmGueifsry such a woman, • It is commonly
doubled, as: ^^GsreS^esriD&^pm, such and such a
man, &c.
7. The Tamuliaus have also a reciprocal pronoun refer-
ring to the uufr^esiauQufr, or third person, viz. ^fi^,
himself, herself, and itself; plural ^n/^adr and ^nih. It'
is thus declined :
-/ • Singular,
1. ^n^, himself, herself, itself,
2. p^eusar, himsdf, S^c.
3. pdsf^eOy by himself, 8fc,
j^esrO^Q, vnth himsdf, ^c.
4. ^€ST&Q, to himself, 8fc,
3d' ErrMoLoer.
6. 06ftr, ^6&rgy6S)L.i4i, ^€8rg», of himself, S^c.
Pfaral
M». and Fem, Ma9, Fern, ani iVettfer.
1. pained, jbn^, themsdaes.
■ 2. ^^a&sff, ^w^iSitPy themselves.
3. piBsefTneOf pibLoneo, by themselves.
p&isQ€rr(iQ, ^ihQLDnQ, loith themselves*
4. p&issr^a0, piD^Qf to themselves,
7. piBsefiL-^^Q), ) pihLSu.^^iOf ) at or in Mem-
psisefiiOy ) pihiSio, 5 selves.
f^nfBa&r and ^/iti) are also used as honorifics; the for-
mer by an inferior to a superior, the latter among equals^
as: pn&is&rGe'n^edtnB&Tj you said.
SECTION XVIII.
(G. § 21.)
1. The eS^uQufri^Qe^niOf interrogative pronoun, is
formed by the letters ct and m with the usual personal
terminations, as :
6T6W65r or (uneuficr, who? what man?
creuen or luneufftr, who? what woman?
er§i or iu!\§i, which? u>hat thing?
Th^ plural: \s' ereafts^ - or luasiift, vshaf whai mien, or
wcmenl GTes>€u or iunemcuj which or what things?
They ate dedined like sucum, ^feuai, ^§i, sieuAs^
iunojfT is used in the plural (mas. and fern.) only. It
is sometimes contracted to tun/t which is also used only
in the plural.
But there is another uj/i/t, commonly contracted into
^, which is used in the singular or plural, (mas. and
fern.) as: <^/t a/fE^ndr, Qjmpnefr, or Qjm^nfrs&r.
2. The interrogative letter ct is, like the demonstra-
tive letters «9f and @, prefixed to any nouns, and means
what? as: (SiibtLed^^^ what man? ^su^fr, what vilr
lage? &c.
3. The particle o-ib added to any such interrogative
pronoun, changes it to a distributive pronoun, as:
€i€u^ib^ luneu^ih, every man.
eieu^ih, iun€U€f^u>y every woman.
CT^Qfthj (Uffci/ib, every thing,
GTeufrs^ih, luneui^Ui, all men or women.
CT&s>Qj^U), Lun66)6}j(L/u>, oU things whatsoever.
When declined the slld is always put after the case,
as: c\su^SQ£tr^Wi ajn6i//D6S)rD[gi2>, &.c.
4. Instead of ct, the adjective form er&^ is most
commonly used. It is prefixed to nouns, as : crfh§iDe^
^6^, what man? dtc.
5. The addition of «%^g2iii> or «§(,@)§afii), changes
these interrogative to indefinite pronouns, thus: otci/®)
£^\hf any one man; ^6L/CTTn<^Q2/u), any one woman;
eT^n^gijii, any one thing; luneurrn^^ib, any persons, dtc.
■i
30 ETTMOLOOr.
6. If the interrogative letter er or adjective erisf^ be
prefixed to nouns and ^ih, or ^d^ib, <%®@)(x> be
affixed to them, such nouns will be affected in the .man-
ner described in the 3d and 5th subdivisions K)f this
section,; thus:
eruutLt^esr(tpw, or erib^uuLLu^€m(ipih, every city.
€Jihu>&fif^^Sffnh, or Gfiof,tD€dp§S)^^ih, any man*
SECTION XIX.
(G. § 22.)
1. The CT^ecsF^jTCIun', nouns of numbers, with their
figures are these:
€p6Srgif. - - . - , ^ 1
@fi-€fer(g, ------e. 2
(!P^&' ^/fc 3
iBn^ or flsneSr^. > . - . . ^ 4
&iB§i, vulgarly, ^^«. - - - (g 5
^&' «r 6
%^^^' o 7
'^...CTd®. « 8
Cp65TU^. At 9
U^&» ^ (0 10
u^©@)6&rg>». iOa 11
ucbsefrretorG. - - - . . ^>e. 12
u^66r^6&r(P* - - - , - lOtfn 13
u^ig)6&r5. - - - - (Off* ' 14
&C. ----- ^^ ^c.
ufQ^n€Ssru§i, .- - - - - u)Sm 19
^(5U§/. - ' . - . . ato 20
y
PRONOUNS. 31
jSgu^Q^nfiSripi. - - - . - aa 21
&c. - - - - - ), &c.
(ipuu^. ■* - - - . if^fj) 3Q
(jpuu^pti^g)i, - - - ^ ff^Q, 31
n>ii0u§i, - - » - - ^tt; 40
.(Bii>u§i. (gu) 50
^.^gjju^. - - - . - si^uj 60
§fL£U§i» - - - - - ©a) 70
.<oT€6cru§}, - - - * - - Att) 80-
G^^/isfer^yrgJ/. j^ - - - - *u) 90
p^g)/. , - - - - fl7 100
f^^QfT)^^. - - - - /na 101
f^f)tptT€dsrQ. me. 102
l^^&(ip^&) - - - m/R» 103
p^fb^S^u^. _ - - - /ne,(0 120
ISJ^0&(ipUU§i, - • - - flTflntO 130
&,C. - _ - - ^^ ^c,
@5p-gtf. em 200
(iph>^^, ----- if^(fi 300
«n@iTg». ----- ^^ 400
Bff*W&* @m 500
Mp^rgi, ^^ 600
i^it^grrgjr. (stm 700
(5T65W@»rQp;. ^m 800
G^ndTarrnuSrro). - - - . ^/^ 900
4Z ETYMOLOGY.
Q^!m€rrnuSrT^Qpn€b[&, • . • -
sk/na
901
Opneia^emiuSn^fneiKQ, . • ^
A»/17S.
q(fo
&c.
j»
&c.
4^vSnib. - - . .
^
1000
4j,u5/r^©^n6Srgv. - - . -
^&
1001
&-C. - - - -
1
" »
&c.
^vSlT^§IUU0§i. • ■ '- W
^to
1010
-?tu5fr^^(5u§(. - '.^ - .
- fie.u)
1020
&/C. - "a " -
»
d^/d.
^m
1100
^s.ni
1200
„ &c.
@frfiforL»nu5/Tii) or fF/rii!i5/ri2).
e^
2000
(jpoifluSrru). - « - ' -
^^
3000
ffifl60/iu5fru). - -
•
^^
4000
©uj/iu5frib. • - r ' -
- @*
5000
^(r)«5/ri2>. - - ■
dn^
6000
€ripnu5fni). * - - - -
€7^
7000
CTG55r^u5n"iB. - - - -
«9/^
8000
^65ru^®«Sn-ii). - - -
*^
9000
u^@)u5n'ti). - - - -
(0^
10,000
@gu^^a5fra). - - -
e.a)di
20,000
((/5uu^@)u5n"i2). - - .- -
/r^(0^
30,000
61^0. - . -
,, &c.
©^/i6fiai'@tfTn[)u5iTtr). - - .
- SmU)^
90,000
^/(puSfTii) or @€OiLffih.
m^
100,000
®Q&rfr){iSmh or @/ragwi9L60tla=i2).
ejn^
200,000
&,C. - - -
„ &C.
jEHrav i3>eOLl^u) or Qsnt^,
10,000,000
' 2. The cavdinal numbers may be considered either
as nouns or adjectives; when used as nouns, they are
placed afler the noun and declined, as: seoQeon^fpi^
one stone; sioeBrre^Q, seo^BncicfesiL^, two stones; sio
^neisLJiio, 6lc» iDtTfip^Py three trees.
3. When they are used as adjectives, they are placed
before the noun and not declined, as : @iT€Sfx(BQua, two
names or persons; ^'6srQ;y^e^ thr*^ stones, 3fc» cpesrgy
when an adjective is often chjfinged into €pQ, as : €f>Q
iD69f^6sr, one man or a ina4 ''and gften to c^ft, as:
gprrflfiJT, one person. . \\ ^ ■
. 4. When united with some nouns, some of them
undergo a change, thus : . ^
@rr6fer(J, 2, may become @5 f as ®Qu^y twenty.
' . iS'S^fiisD, two heads.
^^&f 3, „ „ (iP0T(p as (fpsunuSnu), three Ihovr
sand}(ip^&n€OU), the three tenses,
i^n^j 4, „ „ meo as mipu^y forty.
S^§i, 5, „ ,; *S8/B as ^(bseoihf five kalams.
mu§!, fifty.
^&y 6, „ „ ^fipJ .as M&u§i, sixty.
^i£f 7, „ „ €TLg as erLgu§!y seventy.
crtLQ, S, „ „ eJ€S6r ^3 GT€6GfS€i)u>, eight kalams.
5. Appellative nouns are formed of the cardinal
numbers, thus: of ^5, 1, is made eftf^euetr (vulgarly,
* 05 is then changed to the soft letter which correMpondg to
the following hard one.
34 £T7M0L06r.
€p0^^e8r) one, a person, a certain man, €pr^ff, a
female f a certain woman,
of ®(5 2 ^r^Qjn, two persons. "1
„ ^ 3 (tpejffy three persons. I Whether male or
„ mnso 4 mniOQjfr, four persons. | female.
>»
. — »w — — , ^ ~ — ji — ».„. .
28 5 ffifiw/T, five persons. j
6. To express "one by ^one", "two and two," dtc.
they repeat the initial letter of each number as far
as ten, inclusive. {€fi^u§i 9 excepted.) If the initial
letter be long, it is shortened when repeated, and if
it be a consonant, its mute intervenes ; if it be a vowel,
double iu comes between, (Qesi€u/b§i excepted.)
SfiQjQeun^^, one by one.
QeueSrrdsrQ, two by two.
(tpth^dsr{gi, three and three.
ihfbmn^, four and four,
^esi€ui^§i, five and five,
^iueuDdpi, six and six,
eiojCSeuig, seven and seven,
cjQjGeuiLQ, by eights.
u£iu^§i, by tens.
7. Ordinal numbers are formed by adding the fu-
ture participle <%ib, to the cardinal; excepting €f>dsfQ^,
for which (ip^eo the beginning, is used, as: (tppeORih,
the first; @rr(SdsrL.nu), the second, ufO^mnh, the eleventh,
Sfc. To form adverbs the verbal noun, Mfiu§i is added,
as: (tpp€Oi)€u^f first; ^frsis^uneui^, secondly, Sfc.
rROHOUNS. 35
SCCTION XX.
(G. § 23.)
There are some indefinite pronouns.
1. #60, some; ueo, several, various.
They are used as adjectives, as: #«)ir)6oF^/t, some
men; ueOQufrserr, various persons. They are also used
as nouns, and receiving the usual plural terminations
are regularly declined, t)ius:
1. #6D/t, some persons; ^eo, som£ things.
2. ^sO0S)rr, some persons ; ^60€u^€isiip, some things. '
a. ^eoirniOf by some persons ; #6\)S}7f){r}60, by some thingSySfC.
&c. 6lc. &c.
1. ueotTf various persons ; ueo, various things.
2. U€OeiS)fT, various persons ; ueoeu^esin), various things.
3. U€0iTii60, by various persons; U€06ijp(r)eo, by vaarious
things, ^c.
6lc. Sic. &c.
2, eT6i)€0m, ^s€0(y>ibj Siei£sr0§iu>, (tpijg6S)iDmhf (tpig
Qj§iib, alL
These are thus declined:
1. (sieoeonib, ffS60(ipu), si€usar^§iih, (y^t^esiiDiiffhf (ipt^
Qj§iUi, aU things,
2. CT&oeon6L'/f>6ors)qu), ^seofeof^qib, ^euasr^esifmb,
(jpt^&suD&siiuimh, (jpi^€ue6)p\^ihy aU things.
3. CTdO€On€U(r)rr)^ihy ^seo^j^n^tby ^eusarf^n^ih, (ipig
6S)i£\un^ih, (jfigeufn^ih, by all things.
3C KTTi§t>ha&*
df^miDQiunQih, (tpi£€ijG^i\(Bth, with aU things.
(ipLgGSiLD^Qib, (ipi^eu^^QLb, to aU things, Sfc»
The first three are also formed as personal nouns,
thus: 1. erioeopr^ih, a^seOQih, Si^ussreur^ib, all p^sons^
2. eT€O6On0s>rrtmb, ^seoesinqth, siei£sreu0SirT\L\ih, all per-
sonSi 3. ereoeonrrn^ib, s'seorrn^ibj ^eusareurrn^Lbf by aU
persons, ^c,
SECTION •XXI.
(G. § 24.)
Some remarks respecting the formation of nouns.
There are various kinds of nouns, as :
J. Primitive nouns, as: tLfrtb, U)«6&r, ^ntu, &.c.
2. Nouns formed from ifce oblique case and the ter-
minations ^e&r and ^ea, as :
^5U)U), charity; ^/jtoew/iesr, a charitcfile man.
'*»A<.*».. , { uCisL€srsmGisr, a citizen, (mas.)
uL.iQ.esru>, city ; < ... .^. A /
^ ^ i uL-ijLSOT^^nerr, a citizen, (fern, J
. J! jr ' i ^fh&iiunasr, a male offspring,
if^, offspring; j ^^^^.„^_ ^^^^ ^jj^^^
'' ' ^ ( eficfrnw, a vtUager. (fern.)
3. Personal nouns formed from other nouns by drop-
ping the last syllable, and adding ^csr for the masculine,
and @ for the feminine, ^s: ^sikismth, anger; j^sm
J.
1»R0N0UNS* 37
Attad^, an angry many ^sm&rri?, an angry woman; ^^
,§, beauty; ^ifi&^,a beautiful man, ^jfid, a beautiful
womanf SfC. In some nouns derived from the Sanscrit^
Q serves for both masculine and feminine, as t urrojih,
tin; uneS, a sinner; Qanuu), anger; Qctrd, an angry
person, fyc.
4. Some personal nouns ate formed by adding to the
oblique case the termination arrrr^, for the masculine,
and aniff for the feminine, as: QeuBuso, work; Q€U€iso&
^rru^y masculine, Qoioeoa&frfri feminine, a labourer;
^Qj skeep; ^iLQssnn^, a man who keeps sheep,
^CQ&arrftj a woman who keeps sheep,
5. Others are formed by adding to nouns, <9^eif and
erreS, both for masculine and feminine ; and if the noun
ends in ib, the ih is dropped) as: au^, debt; ai^l^
(g)6Yf, a debtor, whether male or female. ^ipn)w, ^
guHt; ^fppekjrrefi, a guUty person; unddajth, happiness;
urridoj^neS, a liappy person; lj^^) understanding; nfi
f^neS, a clever person*
6. Various nouns are formed from numbers, (see
Sec. XIX. 6,) others from verbs, (see the verb*) Ab*
stract nouns are formed from some obsolete roots by
adding es)Lb to them, as: ^&, small; S&esnD, smalU
ness; l}^, new; L\§i&s)LD, newness; QUfij^, great ; Qu^€S)U>,
greatness, Sfc,
Appellatives m^y b^ formed from tliese by dropping
esiiD, changing &. into @, and adding ^esr, j^qj^, «^€sr,
g^69r, for the masculine singular; ^eff, siOJ&r, ^ea, gperr,
for the feminine singular ) s\&i §it for tlie neuter singular ;
B
38 ETTMOLOGT.
Sifr, sieufr, ^fr, f^fr, for the mas. and fern, plural; s{€Sieu,
^€^j Sii for the neuter plural. Thus : from SfgiesuDy Sfi
m^i ^fSiueu^, ^fSiun^, or ^fiQojir^, a small man; ^fi
luetT, ^fSiJjQjen, ^(BiuneiT, ^pS(*uj/rOT, a smaU woman ; ^{S
aj§i, ^^§}j a smaU thing; ^(Siufr, Sfiiueuh, ^fSiurrfr, ^pS
GiunfTt small persons, (mas. and fem.) ^{Siuesioj, ^fStuesr,
^tSuj, smaU things.
From the abstract nouns above mentioned are formed
also a peculiar kind of appellative nouns by dropping
€S)iDy changing & into @, and adding the following verbal
terminations,, thus :
Verbal Terminations. Appellatives from S&es^m.
Singular^
1. pers. C6!t, ^^Qiigst, I who am a sjnaB person.
SS, <?j,Jii, ^p565)iu, ^fSiurrdj, C thou who art a
' P * gpLU, ^fSQiunuj,- \ smaU person.
3. pers. m. ^ebr, S^\u4k, he who is a smaU man.
3. pers. f. si&T, ^rSuuerr, she who is a small woman^
3. pers. n. §1,. ^fS§i, ii which is a small thing.
1. pers.
Plural
. ro . } ^^ ^f^o ^^c smaU persons.
or <5|fD, ffpajLDj )
2. pers. FFfr, ^s^iSrr, you who are smaO persons.
. pers. / ^^^ ^fSujfr, they who are smaU persons.
m. &* f. )
3. pers. n. ^, ^fjSjj, \ t^ey u,kick are maU thwgs.
or^sor, 0p\um,j
t
VERBS. 39
And these appellative nouns thus formed with eer-
bal terminations may be regularly declined, thus :
1. Pers. 2. Pert. 3. Pers. (m.)
f ^rfx • 1 f"^» thou, he,
f ^^ • X ^ ^^ (to me, thee,
and in like manner through all the persons and cases
both in the singular and plural numbers.
Thus: Qsm^QtutTdi^fSOiueusaFfut^^^iTdj, thou a cntd
person hast beaten me a smaU person. These concbe
forms are however almost ^together confined to poetry.
SECTION XXII.
(G. § 25 to § 28.)
Verbs*
To Tamil verbs belong,
fipeSuih, the three persons'.
fBihunio, fiee dMsum of gender and number,
u^f, the root.
^^, termmating partides.
(jpieareotb, the three tenses.
40
ETYMOLOCr.
^euio, the imperative mood,
cSiuaaQan-eiTf the optative mood,
erSps'ihf the indefinite mood,
QpiTifn)Quajfrj the verbal nouns,
er^frweisipf the negative form of the verb*
1« About (ipeSL.ih and fsu^urrsOf see § xii. and § xiv«
2. u^^, the root of the verb, has no specific niean-
ing as such, but only indicates the general idea of the
verb, as : /bl., walkj u^, learns eSQ, leaver Qun, go, Sfc,
3. Tlie e8^^ is the affix by which the gender, ntim-'
ber, and person are distinguished, as :
Singular,
Com.
«76&r,
676ST, ^65r, or ^meffff I,
do.
^^,
©, - ®, thou.
Mas.
^^.
^60T€ftr, - he.
Fem.
^^.
^eweir, - she.
Neuter
J^§i,
&y - it*
Plwml.
Com.
9i£),
^eorm, «nr), ^li), or ^u), we*
do.
ff/T,
f^frs&Tj or @<T, - you.
Mas. Fem.
. -ft/r,
^sw , or si^ctrr, they.
Neuter
^,
^m, - • they.
SECTION XXIII.
(G. § 28.)
The (ipAsiTet>iby or the fftree tensioi, sune
/§ff£p£/reO£b, present tense.
&pib^srr60ih, or Gu/reorAfrsOib, past tense.
€i^ff&rT€Oihj or 6^(9OdrfT60^, future tense.
VERBS. 41
These tenses are formed by the aid of certain parti-
cles, called @65)i-/f€i6p#©«sFrr;r)«6Tr,« which connect the
terminations, mentioned above, with the root ; and these
particles thus inserted between the root and the several
affixes are the characteristics by which each tense is
distinguished.
1. The characteristics of the present tense are ^gv,
Sebr^, thus:
tBuadCSp&sTj or mi^Ad^CS^m, Iwcdk, •
ir>t^ASQ0ih, or ff>i^i«^65r(3(fl?ii), we wcdk^ ^.
Note 1. sd^, when inserted generally denotes a tran-
sitive, and £^f an intransitive verb. But there are
many exceptions to this.
Note 2. The third pers. neut. plural is always formed
with ^6&rg)/, thus : ihu.^d^(p€m. The vulgar use ibl-A
^^, for the third pers. neut. of both persons.
Hi
/ 2. The characteristic middle particles of the past '><
' tense are ^, tl, /p, and ®65r. f-
i (1.) Roots ending with the mutes dj, /t, or with ■
the vowels ^, @, a., esr, ©, and forming the present p^
tense by adfffiy have ^^, in the past, as: )
. ; QiDiLAdQip^, I feed, Oiduj^Q^&st, I fed,
^\ Qj stiff AdQro^, I train up, suerrfr^CSp^sr, I trained up,
■^ ' ui^sSQpm, I learn, ui^^Qp^ , I learned.
^ u(BAS(ip^9 1 lie doum, uQ^Q^&sr, I lay doum, 8$c, ,
The only exception is, S^&SQtp&sr, I am, @(§M§^,
J was.
Note. In conversation ## is often substituted for
^^, thui :
J.
42 ETrMOLOGT.
For un^^a^^f they say, u(9.#(}^€&r, I learned.
For esioi^Q^^K, „ esiOj^Q^^, I put.
J\ (2.) Roots ending in ^, and forming the presenj
i tense with Arfgif, receive A^, as: iX)rpi^<J(p6&r, I forge^,
I iDffxikOp^, J forgot f ^c.
(3.) Roots ending in e^, &!^, ^, sr, §iy L|, ^,
^i dP, Qi fSiy ^^$ and forming the present tense wi
d^, receive ®^ before the terminations, as :
^i^Q^^, I make, ^^^0€sr6&r, I made. \
§n&i^Qrpdsrf I sleep, §nikidOecr^, I slept.
Gu€r£Opdsr, I speak, Gu^Oesr^, I spoke, SfC.
Exceptions are:
I edetT^dOro^, I open, eSessfGud^r, I opened.
I ffgj/^(J(D6iT, Ibrmgfe^th, fFcirOjp^Sr, I brought forth. \^
'i OurrQ^dp^, J put, (SurrtLQudsr, J put. |
Qarr€h^dQpo€S!r, I take or get, QsrrekrGu^, Itookor got.'
But all roots ending in g, Q, and gy, preceded by,
one short syllable, simply double the last consonant and
then receive the terminations, as :
/ ft^Qtp^,! amfit, ^dOs^, Iwasfit. ^.
I eSQdQoDGsr, I leave, gSlIGl.6^, I left. \
I Qui;^d(ip€l5r, I get, QupOpt)^, I got. \
Note. The third person singular neuter in the past
tense of verbs having the characteristic @68r would be
@€^^; but this is changed to @pg)f, thus: Quttii^Qesf
^, I went; CunruSpg^f, U went; ^vSCm^, J became;
^i6^ff, it became; Qu^pp, it spoke, Sfc,
VERBS. 49
But the common people say,
For OurriiSfifsi, Qun^sr or Gurr^m§if it weni.
» 4J)(^P(P'» ^^^ or ^#«^, %t became.
„ Qu^fpqjif Qu^^sr, it spoke, fyc,
(4.) Roots ending in 6dsr and ^, and forming the )
present tense with d^, receive the middle particle iL :
and ^ is changed into efer, as : I
ZLda^Op^, I eatf eL€dsfQL,€br, I ate. I
^Q^£Op^, Irtde, <%e^(*L.6^, I ruled, 8fc,
Excqftions are:
Si(5ef^^Q^^, I grant, ^d^Qesr^, I granted.
arrcSsrdOrp^, I see, a€&sQu^, I saw.
(5.) Roots ending in d!r,fj^.€0^, and forming the
present tense with digf, receive^^e middle particle jp:
and @2r and eo^, are changed into ^, as :
^^SQrodpi, I eat, ^^(Sposr, I ate,
lipdQp^, from > j^^^^^^ i^Qmebr, I stood.
the root liio, S
Q^io&dCSpdiT, I go on, O^eSrCJpeor, I went on, Sfc.
(6.) Roots ehding in dj, @, ff, 85, 6 ^^^ tf> »°d
forming the present tense with ^fipf, receive the middle
particle A^ and d^ and ig, drop the cl, as :
CuidjdQrodsr, I feed, (J/fi(ii&(J^6Br, J/ei.
»J(J/p6Sr, /^tttje, ff/fe0^6&r, I gave.
dietr^OpGsr, I grow, euetrfriBQ^^, I grew.
QjnigdQp^, I prosper, eurri^fBQfGsr, Iprospered, S^c.
There are many exceptions to this rule.
44 ETYMOLOGY,
Note, The vulgar sometimes change ik0 to @#,
? thus :
\ For ^rSkCS^^, they say ^nS^CireST, I knew. f
\ For ^60L-/R(J^6sr, „ ^eint-^CJ^gw-, /^o/.
(7,) A few roots of only one syllable and forming tfce
present tense with S^, have different forms of fhe n
past tense, as : | J'v^
f ^dOn)^, I become, has Sj^uSQeisr m ^nd ^Qemrn. 1 ,^ v
' QuadQpp^j I gOy „ Cun-u5(j6OT6OT ^nd QunQ&siGa. v^
/ QeuMQfp&s^t I hum, „ OeuihG^^.
'' GiBfrSQpdsff lam in pain, „ GmrrfkQ^&sr, \
The characteristic middle particle of the past tens(
being known, tlie conjugation goes on as in the present
tense. ^
/EL-.n&C^63T, fF.L^fh^rrlhs ^fBL.mp{T^, muikpfTek, &<
' 3. The future tens^fhas only two forms; the charac-^ S^,
teristic middle particle of the first is uu, which is in-j ^
serted between the root and, the terminations in verb<J ^>
which form the present tense with sdigi, as: ;' "^'
fhL.A£Gp^, I walk, mL,uGuasr, I shaU walk, ^-c*
The characteristic of the second is eu, which is in-^
serted in verbs forming their present tense with £(gi, as :
C<9= lu ^Grpeb, I do, Qs=\iiG6U^, I skdil do»
^iSdQcoebr, I know, ^rSQeu&sr, I shxiUknow, Sfc.
Exertions.
(1.) Roots ending in cfer, c&r, €Tr, or tl, receive a
single u, in'stead of eu^ as:
i aa€^£On)€lsr, I see, . sne&srQu&fr, I shall see, Sfc,
VERBS' 4$
(2.) Roots which end in ffii, go^, ^, &icffj or £|> may
, form the future regularly or may drop the &.. One of
I the double consonant3 aUo falls away when the &. itf
■ dropped, as :
^ <?*=»r«)9»J(»p«&r. J tpeak. \ ©"^^8»5a'«^ or) I shaU
i Qs'irii^QQjesr, ) speak*
ASjJSpsSr, J reign, \ *t® ««"* °'\lMl reign.
1 ^ c ^«rrC6SJ6Br, )
I The terminations of the future tense are like those
* of the present and past, as: flSL-uduesr, ttt-iju/rtu, ffit-ij
I u/reSr, &c, except in the thu-d person neuter, singular
^ and plural. Roots whjph form the present tense with
, *^3Pf, form the third person' Eeuter future of both num-
' bers, by adding ^,§ih to the root. Roots which form
the present in ^g)f, add &.ib to4he root, for both num-
bers, thus: mi^^^i it or theij\fi' walk ^ G'dF/r^g^il)^ i
it nr iks»t niiH »au. ^^».' *^^
>;
i^ or they $i)iil My,
V
•*
•peTION XXIV,
(G. § 29.)
The ^€ueOy i. e. the Ifnperative Mood, refers to the se-
cond person only. The simple root makes the lingu-
lar; to this £.u> is affixed to form an honorific 3 and
to this the plural termination am is added to form the
plural, as: /f Q^dj, do thou; lEA Q^ihiifib, do thou, hon.;
tS&i.Ben Q<!Fdjqibs&ft do you or ye; M uis^', learn thou;
^fr ui^iqu), kam thou, bon^; £bs&r ut^iqiBS^, learn
you or ye, ifc*
46 ETYltOLOGT.
SECTION XXV.
(G. § 30.)
The eSiu&iOsir&T, optative mood, has various forms.
1. m added to the root. This one termination serves
for all genders, numbers aiid persons, as :
ffin'6&r, iBiTih,
GaiLa, may I, thou, he, we^ Sfc.
hear,
Qs'nioa, may I, ifc. speak.
3r,J
Note. This first form is not in common use.
2. The second form iMp£ future tense throughout,
with ^s, the infinitive o^%^(d^, affixed, as : mn^ muu
I Gu^s, may J walk ^ i^ ihu.uurTturTS, mayst thou walk, Sfc
3. The third forn^'H^ie infinitive mood with the de-
fective verb gt«.( M) i ttr ^lt^fl5fr6&r muiassu.GQj^, may
I walk; /f mt^Asaa^eutidi, mayst thou walk, 6fc.
4. There is an optatij^ form common among
the people made by adding cpiLQw, from q>iLQdro§tt
to an infinitive, thus : ^€u^ euirQeuntKSih, let hm come.
They further contract this by rejecting the ^, as:
I j^^€UfjC(B^'j ^€U^ ^(i^&iLQib, let km be; ^ojeir
i GunatLQih, let hm go.
SECTION XXVI.
(G. § 31.)
The crii^fh, defect, comprehends all the indefinite
moods of the verb, called participles, gerunds, infini-
tives, subjunctives, d&c. It is divided into two classes
Yuebxat^etsr or ) toko or which
V ■
VERBS. 47
1. QuiuGa^&^ih. They are participles which com-
prehend the relative pronoun. We shall therefore call
them rekUive p<srticiples» They are always prefixed to
some noun. They are three in number and are formed } |
by dropping the personal termination of each tense,
and adding ^, excepting the future, the third person
neuter of which is also the participle future, thus:
Pres» AL-^ JCfpgSr, / vmlk^ mt^^dp, who or whidi waflcs.
Past mt^kOp^f I walked, fBi^mp, who or tchich walked.
JFW. at^SiSih, U toUl wM, at^i^ih, who or which will
walk. y
The relative pronilVuiLfw^/' or "to&icfc," is contained
in the participle, thtf e 4)61% no separate relative pro-
Boun in Tamil.
Note. Past relative participles of verbs which make
the past tense in QGmebr, sgmetim^ substitute uj, for
their final letter 6cr, thus:
^/
Past JBkff. Part.
uebsr^stiQ^srdsr, I made, . . .
< ue^€6t^\Ut ) made.
2. eSosarQiui^^ih. The second class of indefinite
moods. They refer to verbs only. There are five
N^* of them. ,^
•^' (1.) The first indefimte mood or verbal participle, is
formed from the past tense, and ends in ® or &..
Verbs which have QQesr^, in the past tense drop
Om^, as: ^L.^dQ€Gf^, I indosed, ^u.^d, inclosing,
or having inclosed; Q^rreoeSOesrdsr, I said, Q^rreoeS,
saying, or having said, Sfc; but QuiraSdecrasr, I went,
\ I
I
1
4S ICttMOLOGir.
has only (?umu, going or hauing gone; and S(y6<i&st4^i
Ibeccme, has ^lu, becoming ^ or having becomet
All other verbs drop the personal termination of the
past tense, and add £., as : ut^fOf^Gsr, I learned, ui^f
§i, kamhg, or havtTig learned; i^L.I^Of^^, I walkedi
mL.ffi^, waJlkvng, or having walked^ ^c.
\ (2.) The second indefinite mood ends in ^o), @60, or ..
j @6£^, and answers to the £nglish subjunctive mood with if* ,
- The first and common form is made from the past tense !
by dropping the personal termination, and adding Sj,eOf .
as: fl5L.iB(«^65r, nunprreo, if I, thoU, fyc. walk, walked^ or
ihM walk; ui^^Q^idsr, uji^^p^eo.i/ /, thou, S^c. learns
leamedt or fhoU learn, fyc. 'l!fk second form is made
by adding @60, or S^ to the roots of Verbs, which
form the present tense with dp. Bat those which
form the present witlr ^^^, insert ^i before the ®io
and @65r, as: Q^!f^fffy (^rrio^eo, or Q^rrioeSekr, if t
say; mt^, mi^sSiOj if J tvolk; uif., ui^Adeo, or ua^a
Sgst, if I learn, 6fC. . ^
(3.) The third indefinite moodin formed from the first
by adding ^ih. It corresponds to our subjunctive^
with (dtheugh, referring to the past time, thus: O^neo^,
Qs^neOGSiHtb, akhough I said; fhL^k^, tBL^a§iih, although
I walked,
(4.) The fowrth indefinite mood is formed from the
second by adding s-ib. It answers to our subjunctive^
with although, referring to the future time, as : tht^vi
^nio, mL^fh^rr^di, although I should walk. The action
is only supposititious. ^
(5.) The fifth indefinite mood is formed by adding
^■
x*
VERBS. 49
^ to the root. This answers to our infinitive mood.
Thus:* (?ug», Gup, to receive; M^> Silfiy to weep; ^^5,
^rSiu, to know; (?5=iu, Qs'djiUy to do; ^n, tfrroj, to die,
^c. Verbs forming the present tense with i^ip?, insert
^,s before the ^, as: ibu, mt^ss, to walk; ^d^ @S
SECTION XXVII.
(G. § 32.)
The Q^nif^QuiuAj verbal noun, is formed from the
roots and the relative participles.
1. From the roots* Neuter verbal nouns are formed
by adding ^io, ^&)j of es)S to the roots of verba
which form the present tense with ^gy, as ! from ^uiei
^; SlL^iBisio, ^t^(E/(^^eo, SiL.(b^es)af a submitting;
from ^ or ^J(^; ^^io, or .?t«5^%^^65, a becoming;
from Qs'dj; Q^iLmio, Qs^djpio/Os'MJeoa, a doing, 8^c.
But the roots of verbs that form their present tense
with 4bS^, take saeo, ^^<so, ^^^^, or &esis, thus:
From tht^'y /fiu^s^i mu^^eOi mi^e^^eo^ mt^iesis,
a walking.
FromuG; wQAaeo, uQ^pio, uQS(Sf^io, uQieos,
#
a lying down.
Some roots of the latter class are formed into verbal
nouns by adding Liq, others by esiiD, others by €>/, or
eS, thus: from utf.; ui^uq, a learning; Qun^\ Qutrqjt
esiiHy a being patient, patience; ^tf; S\\^^, a destroy^'
ing, de$trtiCtion ; drp; iSpeS, a being bomf birth*
* The final & of roots gives way, even when the root contains
only two short syllables. See Sec. vii. 1.
b2
y
7
)
50 ETTMOLOGT.
2. Frcm the relative participle$. Personal and Neu-
ter verbal nouns are formed by adding ^^f «$f^, ^,
in the singular, and ^ffj eaeuj and eor, in the plural,
to the, present and past participles, thus:
tf Pres. Part. ffii-iJfp, Past Part, mt^lkp.
!^i^&dpeudsr, he who walks , flSL-ns^a/s&r.
ntUsSppGuetTj she who loalks, iBum^sij&r.
tBL^&£rp§it it which walks, ibl.(^^^.
^ . > they who walk, ) ^ .
or €uh&G(r, > { oreunsea.
or esiQJS&r,
or esiQJsefT, > they which watk, <
It will be remembered that the future relative par-
ticiples deviate from the general rule, (See Sec. xxvi.
1,) thus: iBL^s^ih in^tiad of (st-uu; G^ibmh, instead
\ of G^Fiueu, But the future verbal nouns are made on
f .' the supposition that the future relative participles are
.' formed according to the rule by which the present and
past relative participles are formed, thus :
Singular. Plwral.
iBi^uueuetTj he toho will walk, J fl5t-.uu6L//r
tbi^uu€uc(T, she who will walk, I or euife&T,
IBL.UUSJ, *^ ^hich wUl walk, ) or «j)a;«6Jr.
But all verba whose future characteristic is qj, for
euphony's sake, change that o; to u M'henever it is
followed by another oj*
VERBS. 51
In the neuter verbal noun of the singular and the
Mcond form of the neuter verbal noun of the plural,
there is no such change because only one qj occurs.
Thusi as the fut. rel. part, of GsFdjdff)§i is supposed
to be Qs^disiJ, instead of Q^ibmb, we have,
Singular. Plural
I O^djUQj^, he who will do, Q^djueuHt or ojnsetr.
1 0^ibu€J&T, the vcho loiU do, G'^tuuetno;.
0^djQj§t, U uMA ioiU do, Oa^tueuGsr.
Verbal nouns are also formed by adding 60)0) to the
present or past participles, as: tBL^id^pesnD, a wfiik'
ing; mi^fio^esnD, a having walked, ^c.
All the verbal nouns are regularly declined.
Note. 1. The third person n^M^culine and feminine
singular and plural of all the tenses is sometimes used
as a verbal noun, thus:
/
\
mu.A4^(f^^, is the same as mL^^dpeu^.
mu.uunfr, „ „ „ „ /Bt-uufiuit.
flBL.uu/rif'^Qr, „ „ „ „ ffii-uucuif'ficyr.
Note 2. Sometimes verbal nouns, especially in the
past tense, change the final ^Ajdn*, ^oj&r, and Sioj/^ into
96ftr, g^^, and g^/t, thus :
mu.lkG^rT^, for mt^lk^eu^.
Q^djG^rreiT, for Q^dj^^.
iBiLQunrr, for lEtLuoja.
52 , ETyMOLOGY.
SECTION XXVIII.
(G. § 33.)
The Gr$iriD€S)pGuifTifj negative of a verb, has several
forms.
-J- 1. The first form is made by adding the regular ter-
l minations ^^fsr^ ^oi, Sic. to the simple root; except-
ing the third person neuter of the singular which
ends in ,^^, and the third person neuter of the plural
which ends in ^,
, This form has but one tense ; it refers chiefly to fu-
ture time. But it includes also the present and past,
and may be used without reference to any specific
time, to designate nature^ or hahit, ,
"Singular,
ihrr&si thuQeuesTy I shall not^ or I use not to walk.
iS ffiL-a/fTLu, thou wilt not^ or tJum usest not to walk, ^TC
^§1 ihL^€urr§!, it will not, or it uses not to walk.
Plural.
thnih mL-G€urru)j we shall not, or we use not to walk, S^c.
^6S)eii mt—eun', they will not, or they use not to walk.
2. A negative verb may be formed in each tense by
joining the three affirmative tenses of the verb ^ij^adrp^
to the negative verbal participle of any verb, as :
Pres. \ ""'^ '^i-'^ir^6^£<ipek or ? j^ ^, ^^
&LC. d^c. 6lc.
TERBS. 53
Past \ '^"^ i^t-^JT^efiOp^, or } J ^^ ^^^ ^.^ij^^
6lc, 6cc, &c.
Fut. \ """^ i^i-f^nfeOQu^, or ) j ^j^ ^^ ^^^
&C. d^C. &/C.
3. A negative verb may be formed by adding ©eoaso
to the infinitive mood of the affirmative verb. This
negative refers chiefly to the past time, as :
mirdfr, /?, Si^udstj Sfc, mu.AS€Sii>€\eOj I, thou, he, ^c,
did not walk.
4. A negative verb may be formed by adding QeosiM
to the singular neuter verbal noun of the present tense.
It stands for all the three tenses and may be used with
any person and number, as : mrrebry /f, «^'Q;it<56rr,&,c. Q^'Jj
d^0iO€uso, ly thou J they, Sfc. do not, did notj will not do,
Qeoeisa is also added to the singular neuter verbal
nouns of the past and future tenses, and is used with
all persons, and genders, both singular and plural.
iBfT€hr mL^ihp^ 60 €isi) J I did not walk,
it mu/h^^iO€iso, thou didst not walk.
^€u^ thi^kf^^eisOy he did not walk.
dLC. dLC. &C.
mrrib tbL^uu^sOQ£Oj we wiU not walk.
tSfysetT mu.uufiOQso, you unll not walk.
^eufrseiT iBi^uufeooeOj they wiU not walk.
&c. 6lc. 6lc.
5. The imperative («76L/eo) of the negative verb is
made by adding the affirmative imperative of ^((^^Sip§i
i
54 ETTMOLOGT.
to the negative verbal participle of any verb,4Ls: ff mt.
€ijn^(§, do thou not walk; ff/r mt^suirf^f do thou not waUt,
(hon.) ; (tt^a&T mLjeun^t^maen , do ye not walk.
It is still more common to say,
/f KL^QjirOj^ or GSi^f do thou not walk,
^fr thL^€utTO^^lh or 6S)^iqi^, do thou not watk, (hon.)
, ,^^ ) do you not walk,
6. The optative form {<^\jjmQstTe(T) of the negative
verb is made by adding the affirmative optative of jf ^
^&r()§i to the negative verbal participle, as: ibn^ eStfitr
fi§uOu-^St may I not faU; ^ sSififTfQuurrttjna, mayU
thou not faU, fyc,
7. The indefinite moods of th^ negative verb are
formed thus :
*
(1.) The negative QutuQfT^^th, This first class of
indefinite moods, or relative participle, is made by adding
^^ to the root, as:
( vjho or which doe9 not, has
iBL^eufra, I
I not, or will not walk.
* 8
S S <
rs^i.. ^^ C ^^ or which does not, has
I not, or vml not do.
A negative relative participle for each tense may be
formed by adding the three affirmative relative partici*
pies of Qd^^drp^ to the negative verbal participle, as :
Pres. iBLjeurr^d^Sp, who or which does not walk.
Past jBUCLr/r^($/B^, who or whi<h has not walked,
Fut. fBUQjrrfd^^^u), who or xohich will not walk,
(2.) The negative edeeoiGajS'^ui, Of this second
VERBS. 55
class of indefinite moods, the fir$l indefinite mood or
verbcd participle ia formed by adding ^§1^ or ^tLio to the
root, as: ihi^eurr^, or fBL^euniDso, not walking; Gus'tr^if
or Qu^niDio, not speaking , ^c.
The remaining indefinite moods are formed by adding
the affirmative indefinite moods of ®(S&dfp§i to the nega-
tive verbal participle of any verb, as :
2d Ind m J ''s/Tgcr, /ff, 6lc, iBt- > if /, thou, 8fC. do
I euir^iQfhpneo, 5 not walk.
3d Ind m \ ^f^^* ^i ^c- "^^ ? although /, ^c. ifo,
( eun^d^fb^ih, 5 or (2id no/ walk.
Ath I d m J ''^'^^v '^t ^^' ^^ \ oUhough /, ^c.
' ( Q;n'^(|^ffe^rr6)2/i2), 5 should not walk,
6th. Ind. m. thi^ojn^^^ss, not to walk.
Note. The neg. rel. part., and the neg. verb. part,
which ends in ^, sometimes drop their last letter, thus :
Rel. Part. ihi^€U(rf>, becomes AL-arn*.
Ver. Part, ihi^eun^y „ nueun.
8. Negative verbal nouns, ff^prripipQuiufr) are form-
ed (1.) by adding ^&s>U) to the root, as: ffiL.ar/r^ou), a
not walking; Q^iuiunss)u>, a not doing, 8^c.
(2.) By adding the terminations mentioned in Sec.
xxvii. 2, to the negative relative participle, thus : nuojfr
feuds', he who does not walk; mu.ej{T^eu&T, she who does
not walk; thL.€unf§i, it which does not walk, SfC.
66r ETYMOLOGY.
PARADIGM I.
A verb forming the present tense with aS^,
PRESENT.
Singular, t. .
m/rcftr uif.^ J(?^6sr, or utfLiSdstQp^k, I learn.
^ ui^^S(ffub, or ui^^^QSTdT^ibj thou leamest
iSfr uu^^StpfTy or ut^sd^fpft, thou learnest, (hon.)
^iQj^ ui^^d(fi;^, or ui^^^Gsr(ff^^f he leama,
^euiT uu^^^iff^fr, or ut:^i£6bT(ir;fr, he learns, (hon.)
^^&T ui^^d(ff&T, or ut^*i4^(2^efr, she learns,
^§i ut^^Sp§i, or ui^^d^p§i, it learns.
Plural. *
^nih ui^^dO^n^ihf or ui^s4^Q(ff^Lb, we leanu
^&i&etT uis^&^ffts^i or ui^a ^cfcrgS/rscrr, ye learn.
. or ui!^&4^((rfha(srry )
^€S)a/£5€Yr ui^^Jfisir^epr^ /Aej^ learny (n.)
PAST.
Jugular.
/Errc&r ui9.^(?^c&r, I learned,
' if u(9.^^(u, thou leamedst,
i^ft ui^^ffr, thou leamedst y (hon.)
^Q/e&r L^^prretTy he learned.
Sieuif^ui^^^nft, he learnedy (hon.)
J^&t Ui^^fnet^y she learned.
^^4J{^^^§;, it learned.
VERBS. 57
PluraL
ffirril) ui^-^CJ^/Tii), iye learned,
tSfbaeh ui^^fffserTf ye learned,
^euns&r ui^^^rrfrBetTy they Uamedj (m. d& f.)
^65)6i;£OT ui^^p^f they leamedf (n.)
• c*
FUTURE.
Singidar.
mnefsT ui^uCSuebrJ wUl team. >
(^ ui^uufrii, thou wUt te^m,
f^iT ui^uiSfr, thou wilt ledrHf (hon.)
^GU&s^ LJ^LuurroTT, he will learn,
^Qjrr ui^uuniTj he wiU l^am^ (hon.)
^euerr ui^uu/rsYT, she will learn,,
^§} uif^d^fh, it will learn, 'h ^. '^f^.
/
W
■ f
•r
Plural. .
i'w?-"'
/ '«
t • \.
fhrrih ui^uOufTih, we will learn,
i^iasm ui^uiSnaeh, youwill learn.
Si6ufrs'<!t ui^ijufr/T«6tT, they tvillleafn, *(m. 6l f.)
^esieusen ui^a^ih, they will learn, (n.)
IMPERATIVE.
rf uijL, learn thou,
r?/T ui9.n,»i2>, learn thou, (hon.) \j'.<
\
r^fkisefT ui^qiEis^, learn ye.
A
58 ETYMOLOGT.
OFTJkTIVS.
Fkstfofm.
^ *u(^^a, may /, thou, he, ^c.
team.
Second form*
mn^ ut^uQu^a, may Ileaam,
^ ui^uuiTiutTSf mayst thou leam.
(ih ui^L/LSorra, mayst thou learn, (hon.)
^fi;6&r ut^uun^e, may he learn.
^Q7fV ut^uufnms, may he ham, (hon.)
^€u^ ut^uutTstTfTSj moy she learn.
S{§i uif-uupns, may it lecam,
nnth ut^uOurrtDtrs, may we learn,
^eiaen ut^uiSftserrna, may ye learn,
Siojfrs&r ut^uuirfrsmns, may they learn, (m. d& f.)
Sl^s>€iJa&r ui^uuesfeuna, may they learn, (ii«)
Third form,
fs/re&r ut^&aiiaL^QQjeiff, may I learn.
£ uL^aaiaL^eunib, mayst thou learn.
/fir ut^^a^sueSnt mayst thou letmi, (hon.)
^fiueor ui^^aAsL^Qjrrdsr or aueudsr, may he kam.
^eu/r u,9.isiaueuna or ) ^ ^ ^^^ ^^^.
ai^eufr, )
^*yoU. i, being inierted in this, and »ome ■imiiar cases, makea
the first form of the optative to appear lomettmea like the Infini-
tive.
VERBS. 59
^eu&iT ui^AsAsL-eurreh or aueu^Tj may she learn.
Si§i ui^ia^su.€i}§ij may it kam.
iBtTih ui^^sAsL^OojiTihj may we learn.
iStkaerr uu^As^au.€Saserrj nuxy ye learn,
^QjrfsefT utSLAs&au.6un:Ft ) , . . _ .^
. . . > mautheuleamAm.eifi.)
s&T or aueuna&Ty ) » ^ '
^esioj ui^ia&aL-euesr, may they kam, (n.)
Fourth form.
I ^€urraea,
u^&aCJ^m, may I, thou, ^c.
learn.
/
l8t CLASS OF INDEFINITE MOODS, OR RELATIVE
PARTICIPLES.
ut^&Stp, who or which learns,
ui^^^i who or which learned,
ut^&^ih, who or which wiU learn.
2d CLASS OF INDEFINITE MOODS.
The 1st Indefinite mood ) . ^ learning or
or verbal participle, > I hamng learned.
2d Ind. mood, \ ""tif^fH: J"/:^ \ U<L^H^.
«■! T J J ^ • ^ although J, thou, 6cc.
3d Ind. mood, u^^gim, J ^^^^^
, . - , J J. . • i although L Sec. ^undd
4th Ind. mood,uif.^^rr^LD, < ^ ' ^ .
« ( learn.
5th or Infinitive, uip.id», to kam.
60 ETYSfOLOGY.
VERBAL NOUNS.
1st. Abstract verbals formed from the Root.
ut^^^eOj a learning. />
ui^s^^io, a learning, /
LH9.«65)s, a learning, jri ^it^v
u^Luq, a learning, /., ^ ,
2d. Personal and neuter verbals formed from the Relative
Participles.
Present.
ui!^s£fp€ii6br, he who learns.
ui^iSpeu&Tf she wJio learns*
ui^s£po§!, that which learns,
ui^iSipQjff or Qjfrs&T, they who learn.
Past,
Ui^0^€UGSif he who learned*
ui^^peu&T, she who learned,
uif.^^^, that which learned.
uufL^peA or suffsm, they who learned,
Ui9.^p^eu or 6^e.B■^n, ) ^^ ^^,^^ ^^^^^^^^
Future.
ui^uueuefsTf he who iviU learn*
utjLuuejsrT, she who will learn.
VERBS. 61
uu^uu§i, that ichich tciU learn,
ui^uueufr or ojirsen-, they who wUl learn,
u^uu^su or 6B)6i/4«r, > ^^^^ ^^.^^ unll Uam.
Abstract verbals formed from the Relative Participles.
uti^AdG5rpejS)iD, a learning,
ui^^pesiiDf a having learned*
PARADIGM II.
A verb forming the present tense with Jgj;.
PRESENT.
Singidan
tntTGST ue^^dOtpebr, or udsr^SdiCSp^, I make,
if> U635rggii^(27tu, or uecw^g/^eir^fl/ij, thou makest,
i^ff u€Sisr^dffr, or udsr^^j^esTf^fr, thou makest, (hon.)
^6L/6cr U€ssi<^jd(ri7&sr, or LJ655r'g|2/'^65r^€&r, he makes,
^€iia ue^^iSirrjn, or Uoj5Br^y.^^^n7/T, he makes, (hon.)
S\€ue{T udsi^^^itT/etT , or U€^^iiS^(rrica, she makes,
^§1 u€SGr^i}Sp§!, or u^^i)dcsrp§}, it makes.
Plural,
mtTih u^^S<}(if^ih, or u€ssr^S^(S(ir;ib, we make,
f^iBserr u€^^s£^rrsefr,or u€^^dmip^serr, you make.
^a;fr««r urfs^%fr««r or ) , ^ ^
LJ655rgg/.^€5r(A^fr«6yr, ) ^^ ^ ^
49/€Q)q;a^ u€m^ii£€lsrn)€m, they make, (n.)
b3
^2 ETTMOLOGT.
PAST.
Smgidar.
mn^ Dfl5Br«RjFC63r65r, I made,
f^ uGkfstsfir^dj, thou madest.
iSf^€SS(ets^-6t^fr, thou madest, (hon.)
SieuasT ufiferew^^fisr, he made.
^aj/t LJ655r6caPvg)it, he made, (hon.)
Sleu&T u€&jr«Rjf^sYr, she made,
us5cr63sfa=*, (vulgar) J
Plural,
iBnib uemesdrQ^ih, we made,
i^&iseiT u6Bcr«Rjr63fn-<56rr, you made,
^eurrs&T U6&r63rf,g)/T«6rr, they made, (m. & f.)
^65)fiL/«6Tr U6fei6crf60f, f^cy modc, (n.)
FUTURE.
Singular,
fl5/T6Sr u6C3r^(5a-'6&r, / wUl make,
fl) ufifor^suiTiti, ^Aou wilt make,
i^fr u€3cr^caS.t, fAou wiU rmke, (hon.)
^'suecr usKsr^ya/rresT, he vnll make,
^Qjfr u€ssr^6unfT, he vnll make, (hon.)
^6L/6Tr Uficcr^psu/Tcrr, she wUl make,
S{& u^^ii^j ^^ ^^ ff^ake.
Plural,
)Erri2) u^^iQeunih, we iviU make,
/^{ba&r uesN^s^na&T, you toiU make.
VERBS. 63
SHQjffa&T u€9st^eutTfrs&Tj they will make, (m. 6l f.)
^€Si€ua&fT uebsf^ih, they wtO, make, (n.)
IMPERATIVE.
M ueSs^)!, make thou.
dn udet^iLb, make thou, (hon.)
d&a^ um^^s&T, make ye.
OPTATIVE.
First form.
STT, )
ueiof^s, may I, thou, he,
^c. make.
Second form.
mn^ u€isr^QojiQ}a, may I make.
/f u€SBf^€uniUfrs, mayest thou make.
^/t uess^iieSirrrs, mayest thou make, (hon.)
^€u^ u«Rs-@2ia//r(g)5, may he make.
^Qjfr LJ6*jr@Bf62jn-(rfr«, may he make, (hon.)
^SDelfr u^^aiirerrrTS, may she make.
Sl§i u€ixsF^€uprrs, may it make.
mfiib ue&s^aQeumDrrs, may we make,
^m&en ueSsr^eSfrsstrrTS, may you make.
^Qjft&&r uesw^nsurrfrserriTS, may they make, (m.dtf.)
^€B)Qyfi(»r ueta^€ii95(eurTa, may they make, (n.)
Third form.
mn€br uasasfssuO&ibisr, may I make.
A
64 ETITMOLOGY.
/!> uekfeOfs^L^Qjaiu, mayesi tkau tnake»
i^n u€6ct€SsimBL^ff, modest thou make, (boo.)
^ ^. ^ { »wiv he make.
^ . > may he make, (hoii.)
Ov A i i ft) i/Tj ^
or AL-6i;6rr, ) ^
^^ u€ssiGsasaL-€ii^, may t< moAre.
/^n-ii) u&ssr€SsissL.06urTihy may we make.
i^!a&&r uimestsf&aueBffs&T, may you make.
^eui^ssri uesoieBix^aueurrffs^ ) may they make,
or suai/TtftSTT, ) (m. & f.)
^€Q^€ua&T u€^€SsrisL.euG5r, may they make, (n.)
Fourth form.
^fiu6sr, ) . . } utssressrCQib, may I, thou, he
.5>/^, Sl<SS)6U,
1st CLASS OF INDEFINITE MOODS, OR RELATIVE
PARTICIPLES.
uesa^Sp, who or which makes.
u€^6OTf€OT, who or u;^icA mae^e.
ucMT^jlfii), who or u'Aic/i unZi maA:^.
2d CLASS OF INDEFINITE MOODS.
The 1st Indefinite mood ) uessfeat^, making or hav-
or verbal participle, > ing made.
ncueu 65-
2d Ind. ( u^Gft^^io, £J€jfor ) if /, thou, ^c. make,
mood, C 699^60, u€6si€0fff^, ) made, oi shaUmake.
3d Ind. mood, u«OT«*Fiijm, J '^^"^^ '' '*'»'' *<^-
( made,
4th Ind. mood, u6&r«jBf®92ii£), { ^^^<^9^ I 4rc.
( should make,
5th or Infinitive, usisr€6cr, to make.
VERBAL NOUNS.
1st. Abstract verbals formed from the Root.
t
u€ssi(meo, a making.
u€SG(^i^i)), a making.
usssf^iGSia, a making.
2d. Personal and neuter verbals formed from the Relative
Participles.
Present.
uG^^udcpcuesT, he who makes,
u€^^i£fpen€{Tj she who makes.
u€ssf^iSip§i, that which makes.
U€&i5r^)i£ip6ufr or eunsen, they who make.
Past.
udsr^Qor^urfiL/tfOT, he who made.
LJ€6Qr€oof69r6i/(BiT, she wJio made.
uciGf€atir€ST^f that which made.
udsf'Stst^emsuir or euneeh, they who made.
U6ss^€0f^€sr€si6u OT €Si€u&€nf they which made.
66 ETrffOLOtT.
Future.
ue^^ueu^, he who wUl make.
usssr^^ufiL/OT, she who wiU make,
u€3cr@2»£L-^, that which will make.
ueSof^iiueijif or eun^etr, they who wUi make,
U6fe@i,u«)a/ or «s)«j«dr, j ^^^ ^^^^ ^ ^^^^
Abstract verbals formed from the Relative Participles.
u€isr^nS^r[)si5)tD, a making.
uo^srsnsfeoreoLD, a having made.
NEGATIVE OF THE VERB OF PARADIGM I.
1. A TENSE FOR FUTURE TIME, OR COMMON FOR
ALL TIMES.
Singular.
mrreSr ui^Qiudsr, Iwill not, or use not to learn,
d ue^tundi, thou wilt not, or usest not to learn.
^h ui^iSa, thou toilt not, or usest not to learn, (hon.)
^eudsT ut^ojtr^, he wiU not, or uses not to learn.
^eufr ui^iUfTfr, he vAU not, or uses not to team, (hon.)
^Qj&T uti^turretT, she wiU not, or uses not to learn.
^§1 ui^tun§i, it unU not, or uses not to learn.
lE/rib ut^(Sajmh, we wiU not, or use not to leam.
^itsetTut^^frsen, ye wiB not, or use not to leam.
. . . . ( they wiU not, or use not to
^f€s>€u ui^fun, they will not, or use not to leam, (n.)
V£ABS.
67
/
2. THE NEGATIVE VERB FORMED IN EACH TENSE.
Present
Past
Future
^'C. &.C. &/C.
OrU^LUJrrU)6l^($/B(?^62Tj )
(^ ui^iunu)eS(!^ii^niif ) learn.
&/C. &/C. &c.
"/B/TcSr Lj(5LUjfr^(5LjQu6sr, ^
or u^L'jufr(£)65(/5u(Ju6w, 5
* u'?-'"'r<?(5;^'urri. or t ^uiuiMnot learn.
&/C. &/C. &c.
/ tm^ not learn.
V
3. A NEGATIVE REFERRING TO THE PAST TIME.
^g/, mfrih, i^fBsofT, > ^ \ cM not
^Qjfrs^, ^&5i^e&T,
QjSVf
I
kam.
4. A TENSE COMMON TO ALL TIMES.
tBne^f iS, d^c. &:c. ut^^^rp ? /^ thou, fyc. do not, did
^eOQ£0, 5 not, will not learn.
SPECIFICALLY FOR PAST AND PRESENT TIME.
ihnefsT, i^, dcrC. ui^^p^eOQso, I, thou, 6^c, diif not learn,
mnasr, ^, ^q, ut^uu^iOQso, I, thou, ^c. wiU not learn.
6$ ETYMOLOGT.
IMPERATIVE.
t
1^ ui9Lttjrr^(5 or ui^luu/tC^, do thou not learn,
n ui^iufT^if^iD, or / ^^ ^^^ ^^ learn, (hon.)
i^iB&&T uiflL4UfrA'5/fe<S6Tr, > , , ,
^ , , ( do ye not learn,
or ui^oi/rCJ^tq/BSfaTT, )
OPTATIVE.
*" /Krr 6or ut5LUJfr^(5u(?Li,g^<s, may / not learn,
(^ uu^\un$^uurriunaj inayst thou not learn.
f^h u4jLiuiT^(5uJir/rtf, mayst thou not learn, (hon.)
^6i/65r ut^ujfr^(5uun"^5, may he not learn,
^Qjfr ui^iurr^uurmfTSf may he not learn, (hon.)
^eusrr ui^ajrr0(§uuiT€rTrTS, may she not learn,
^§1 u(jL'tejfr^(5ULJ^/T<5, may it not learn.
mfTib ui^turr^i^uQuff.iDns, may we not learn,
t^iksstT LjqL[Ufr^(5ut3/T«6yrfrff , may you not learn,
, . jo ' ' ^ niau they not learn,
( (m. & I.)
Si^Qj ui^^urr^d^uuiorojrra, may they not learn, (n.)
1st CLASS OF INDEFINITE MOODS OR RELATIVE
PARTICIPLES.
iji^^ For any tense.
Vii^vjfTp, who or which does not, did not, wiU not learn.
For each tense.
y. ' ; s^' ui9Li/n-^(/5« Jfp, who or which does not learn.
H' ^' ui^iurrff^ikp, who or which did not learn.
r?**" ui^iunfs^&ui, who or which wUl not learn.
V£RB8. 69
2d CLASS OF UVDSFINITG MOODS.
1st Ind.m.or ( uijLttj/rg,. or ) ^^ ^^ .
Verb. part. ( ui^io/riijo), ) ^ .
2d Ind. > ¥t''Tfhs I thou, ^c, do not
mood, 5 ^^^'^^cS/fe^n^ J fe«,„.
3d Ind. > ^j!^B^ •* ^ although I, 8fc. do, or
mood^ ''^'''^^J^ I ' did noi learn.
mpod, > ^^ ^© ^ 9^ ' ^ 5^a«W not learn.
5th or Inf. u^Liun-^d^iS^, not to learn.
NEGATIVE VERBAL NOUNS.
1. Abstract verbal formed from the Root.
uiyLOifr^ifl, a not learning, 'i-j -^ ^Ut
2. Personal and neuter verbals formed from the Re-
lative Participle.
/
ui^[UiTpQj^f he who does not learn.
ui^'junpojetT, she who does not learn.
ui^\uiT^§if that which does not learn.
ui^iun^Qjfr or euns&Tj they wJio do not learn,
uia.uj/T«65)Qj or 606i/«6rr, ) . , . • , ^ ,
', } they which do not kam.
70 ET7MOL007.
NEGATIVE OF THE VERB OF PARADIGM IL
I. A TEN8E FOR FUTURE TIME OR COMMON FO&
ALL TIMES.
kr. /ViM^*- Singular.
mtTfir u€&3fQ€SS[€trf I loiU notj or use not to make.
^ uds^iu, thou wilt not, or uaest not to make.
^, , g. ^ thou wilt not, or usest not to make,
( (hon.)
^fo/fi&r u€6or@)6in^, he vnll not, or uses not to make.
• ^j^ ' ^he wUl not, or uses not to make,
i (hon.)
^QjGir udof^etT, she will not, or uses not to make.
Si§i U€Ssf^§i, it toill not, or uses not to make.
Plural,
amh u€ii!t6^th, we xmll not, or use not to make.
tha^ u<fer««ffr««r, \ ^ •""« "<"' oruienotto
i make.
j^.t«dr ua,&fts^, \ ^ ^rua.ox use not
(to make, (m. & f.)
^«0)Qj u^^, they unll not, or use not to make,{n.)
2. THE NEGATIVE VERB FOitMED IN EACH TENSE/
/I? u6d6r@^([^^^(^iL/, or ^ thou dost not
u6isr^tDf8it^d(fr^\u , > make.
6lc. 6lc. &.C.
l^
VERBS. ' 71
€Ssrf^^(f^ihprr\u, or > thou didst not
^mnOr LKfer®^<(5&C^6&r, \ j ^id not make.
j/TJU, or >
&c. &,c. dtc.
Future! OJ* L'^® ">«^(!5L/(Ju6&r, >
if uescf^^d^uundj, or i /Aou xciU not
, U€B5r@)IX)6l5(5L/LJfriL/, 5 »w^««
d^C. &.C. d^c.
3. A NEGATIVE REFERRING TO THE PAST TIME.
4. A TENSE COMMON TO ALL TIMES.
^ ' /EH'^Sn', /?, &c. ufifer ^ /, ^Aoi<, 4i-c. do not, did not,
^drp^iOQso, 5 will not maJc&.
SPECIFICALL7 FOR PAST AND PRESENT TIME.
^ «/r6fir, /«, &c. U6fcr > j ^^^ ^^ ^^ ^^ ^^^
€fsf€Cfp€06JSO, )
IMPERATIVE.
^ rf u«&r®#;5, or ? ^ ,^ ^^ „^
Xft u^s»46>i>.oi J do (A<n» «o» m«Ae, (hon.)
72 KTmoLoar.
or u6S9r^C?^ii^/&««vr, ;
OPTArTiyE.
^' flsn-fSr u6CBr@)^(5tj(Jutg)«, may I not make. ■
tS ussd^^fi^ufTiurrs, maysi thou not make.
i^n u€m^^(i^uf5fjrTs, mayst thou not make, (hon.)
^eusisT u€$Gi^fi(^uurT^Sy may he not make.
&C. &.C. d^c.
1st CLASS OF II«D£FINITE MOODS OR RELATIVE
PARTICIPLES.
For all tenses.
who or which does not, did not, iciU not
I
i make.
For each tense. .
u€^^^(l^s4p, who or which does not make.
ussisr^^dSi^p, who or which did not make.
u€$Bi^^((^^^ih, who or which wiU not make.
2d CLASS OF INDEFINITE MOODS.
1st Ind. ni. or > U6&^§/, or ) ^^ ^
Verb. part. > ueSN^iDso, ) ^
mood, ) I not make.
3d lud. > , £^x^ .\ S although I, &c. do,
mood, > . c or dtd not make.
4th Ind. >^,. j?i^,.j.S although /, 8(c.
mood, > ( should not make*
5th or Infinitive, u€scr^0f§s&, not to make*
CAUSAL VERBS. */9
NEGATIVE VERBAL NOUNS.
1. Abstract verbal formed from the root.
ueSsr^GSiUif a not making.
2. Personal and neuter verbals formed from the Rela-
tive Participles.
U€8sr^^Q}dsr, he who does not make,
u^^^su^y she who does not make,
uessr^p^, that which does not make.
udsf^peurir or eufrseiT, they who do not niake,
U€SGrem^€s>6u or 6»ibw<sbqt, > ». » » ^ t
_^J^ I they which do not make.
SECTION XXIX.
d^'^^-^eiyj^j^^ § 34.)
Causal Verbs.
Ruk. Causal verbs may be formed by dropping the
pjersonal termination of the future tense^ and adding
Qs£p^, thus :
Causal.
utifuaSOrodsr, I learn, > ui^udsdQ^ttr, I cause to learn,
Fut. ut^uGu^, > or teach,
F^t t?*^**' ] <^'-^-^^P^. r cause to do.
srreSorSQp^f I see, > sne&oFiSaSGpetr, I cause to see or
Fut» aamQu^, ) I show.
G
L
I
74 ETTMOLOOT.
These causal verbs are regularly conjugated, thus :
Present, iE/r6sr ui^ui3&d(in)^t I teach, Sfc.
Past, (srr6^ ut^uiS0(S§^, I taught, 8fc.
Future, fls/resr ui^uiSuGuGsr, I shall teach, SfC.
SECTION XXX.
(G. § 35.)
There are several defective verbs of which only some
parts are in use; these are
1. Of the root, cp, equal or agredng.
The 3d pers. neut. fut. q^a^ih, it agrees, it is equal.
The pres. rel. part. <p<s JeSrno, who or which is equaL
The past. rel. part. €f>^p, who or which was equal.
The fiit. rel. part, cjna^ib, who or which will agree.
The verb. part. €p^^, agreeing, being equal.
The inf. mood, "^qjoj, €f>uu, to agree.
The verbal nouns, \ ^^/^'. "^ «*^ "f ««»• ,.
' ( and ^uq, agreement, equaUty.
Neg. dd pers. neut. sing, cpeueutr^, it does not agree.
•M- 1 « -* ^ • - i ^^ Of which does not,
Neg. rel, part. ^^eu^p, J ^ ^^^ ^a not agree.
Neg. verbal part, j ^l^lfio, \ ^* ""freeing.
Occasionally, however, we meet also with the three
tenses, as :
^<s<£6&rGflO^, I agree.
eji^Qpdsr, I agreed.
qiuQu^, I shall agree.
DEFECTIVE VERBS. 75
^ 2. Of the root, Gaiflfcr®, necessity.
Th^e 3d pers. neut. > q^^^^^^ ^ ^ nccma/3^, i/ must.
The past. rel. part. C«u6fcrijL«;, j ^^^^^^^
The verbalBOuns, < J ,i,!!!'TT''n t.
In the negative form, CQi6&jr(./ru), i^ mus/ not.
^ Note. For CojeferSm, the vulgar use Qeu^ih, and
for G6u^i~.rTih, eunessfL^mh, or €i;rr@u). This defective
verb must not be confounded with G€U€SsrQdp^f to cfe-
sire, to beg, which is regularly conjugated through all
the moods and tenses.
1/ 3. Of the root, tofrilQI, possibility, ahility, used only in
tDnCGi^Gsr, I can, or wiU not.
t/jfrtlL-n-LU, thou canst, or wUt not.
LDntlis.fr, thou canst, or unit not, (hon.)
tD/rilL-n-efer, he can, or un^ no^
LD/TtlL-fT/t, Ac can, or u>i/Z not, (hon.)
LDfTiLt^fTm, she can, or wiU not.
tDfTiLurr^, it can, or wiU not.
iLniLGurrih, we can, or imll not,
LDrriLi&.frs&r, you can, or wiU not,
. LDntLi^iriTsm, they can, or unll not.
. . I c tDtriLt^rrp, who or toAtcA is not able.
The verbal par- OcrrL-t-n-^ } ^t being able.
ticiple, I iDrruL^rriDeo, J ^
4. Of the negative verbal roots, @eo and cSy^ signi-
The negative ^
form,
76 ETTMOLOGT.
fying not. S^o denies the epoistence, and j^eo the quaUiy
of a thing.
fSioQG\)tSsr, ji^eoQej}^, lam not,
^eoeondj, ^€0€O(rib, thou art not.
QeOeOrr^, jflideorr^, he is not.
1 ®eoei)n€iT, ^eoeOrr&Tf she is not.
l®eoei>^, ^eoeotr^, it is not.
f ®ioQ€0{Tih, ^eoQeanih, we are not,
p. , j ®60€&frsGfr, j^eo^s&Ty you are not.
^* ' I ®i060rrfra^,^iO€OfTns€(T,theyarenot,(m.&S.)
\^ Qeoeoesr, ^o)606or, they are not, (n.)
Verbal i^^^^^y* Jfl^eorr^* )
< @€Oei>fruieo,*^0O€}^mD€Of* > not hemg.
@eO€0{T€aiU>,*^&>€On6SiU>,* ^anot being.
j^^cOrr^GLyeb/ ,syQ)60rr^a/ear,* he who is not.
QeoeOtrpojerr,* jii€0€OrrpQj&r*'she who is not.
®60eorrp^,^ ^ioeorr^,^ that which is not.
Note. Those marked with an asterisk [*] are in com«
mon use.
^>l^ 5. Of su&Ti the opposite of @a), affirming existence.
^ Third pers. for all genders^ &.«iScr(S, there is.
Rel. part. SL&T&r, uho or which is or was.
'&€S9r6S}a), a being; truth.
f r . , &.€(T€a€udsr, he who is..
Verbal nouns, i . • r i •
' ^etretrojetT, she who ts.
, &.err6(r^, that which is.
6. Of Quir^f denoting sti^eiicy.
3d pers. neut. fut, (kJttffiih^ it is enough, suffident.
Verbal
nouns.
DEFECTIVE VERBS. 77
Neg. 3d pers. neut. sing. Gurr^rr^, it is not enough.
T^T , . ^ ( who or which is not
Neg. rel. part. Gunpnp, ^ ^^^j^
Neg. verbal nouii, QurrprretsiiD, < ^i^*^«^
7. Of the root <si^, denoting necessity^ dufy, t(ie whple
of the future. tense, thus:
ai^Goj^, I mast, or mmj.
^L^eurrii, thou fnust, or mayest,
AL-eSr, thou must, or mayest, (Jipn*)
. ' } he must, or may.
. ' > she must, or mm. '
&L.€u^, it must, or mcn^.
jBL-C^oyn*!!), toe m«9f, or may*
si^Mseirr, you must, or may.
«ll^I«^' ""' S ^^ "^^^ ^' '"^y* (m. & £)
«L.6U60r, they must, or mo^, (neut.)
Verbal noun^ au69)u>, <fo^.
8. Of the root p^, denoting fitness, propriety, the whole
future tense, as :
^Gojdsr, I ought, lam fit* ^
^Qjndi, thou ougktest*
ji^surr^, he ought,
p^sufT&r, she ought.
^^ib, it ought.
&c. &c. &c.
78 ETYMOLOGY.
Past. rel. part. ^&a, who or which was or is fit,
Fut. rel. part. ^u>, who or which will befit.
Inf. mood, p&, to be fit*
^ ( fitness, propriety,
Verbalnouns, < ^&&qj^, he who is fit.
I ^s&euetTf she who is fit.
[^p&s^, that which is fit.
Neg. rel. part. patrpj who or which is not fit.
Neg. verbal part. )^^^^\ i not being fit.
C parrpoj^, he who is not fit.
Neg. verbal nouns, < ^arr^euerTy she who is not fit.
I pan^, that which is not fit.
SECTION XXXI.
(G. § 36.)
A passive voice is formed in Tamil
1. By adding u(BdOpp€sr, I suffer, in all its modifi-
cations to the infinitive mood of any transitive verb,
thus: ^t^aauuQSQp^, I am beaten ; jfji^aauuiLQL.
]€sr, Twos beaten; ^i^aauuQQsu^y I shall be beaten,
:8fc. 8fc. This is the most common form.
2. By adding Q%fgii£p^ in the same way, thus:
^i^aauQugiidQrf)^, I get a beating, i. e. I am beaten.
^t^aauGuir)Gipdsr, I got beating, i. e. I was beaten.
^t^aauQus)i(S€u^, I shall get beating, i. e. I shall be
beaten.
3. By adding, in some instances, the verb e.6^
FORMATION OF VERBS. 79
4(Jp6&r, / eat, figuratively, to primitive verbal nouns,
thus:
^€Sip^eSsf£Q^^t I ^^ stripes, i, e, I am beaten,
«^6S>rpii^^(»L.eor, I ate stripes, L e. Twos beaten,
«^69)ri)tL|6&jrGu6&r, I shall eat stripes, i, e, I shall be beaten.
^iLQessSQp^, I am buffetted.
&c. 6lc, &c.
jflg^uqdarSQrD^, I am cut off,
&c. &c. &c.
Thus : afr^pff^^GSieui^eO&^rpqdsn^nir, the Lord was
crucified.
SECTION XXXII.
(G. § 38.)
Some particulars respecting the derivation or forma-
tion of verbs.
VERBS FORMED FROM OTHER VERBS.
1. Intransitive verbs are formed into transitive by
inserting f^ between the simple root and the charac-
teristic particles J^ or Jesr^, as: iBuaSro^, to walk;
iBU0^Sp^, to make to walk, to direct; ^i^&Sfp^, to lie
down; Si^^^drp^, to make to He down, to lay down;
uQSfp^, to suffer; uQ^^drp^, to make to suffer, to affect.
In the same way, some verbs already transitive, become
doubly so, or become causal, thus : stw&drp^, to bear
a burden; SriD^^Srp^, to make one carry a burden, to
put upon,
2, If the root end in ^ or Q, transitive or causal
€10 £T7M0L06r.
verbs are formed by doubling the /J) and il, as : ,g^
Sn)^, to be comforted; ^^S^^rp^, to comfort; ff^Qdtp^,
to run; f^CQdp^, to drive; <^Qdff)^, to jday; ^CQS
tjP^, to make one play, S^c,
3. Roots which end in a^, ihq, are formed into
transitive or causal verbs by changing the tb and u),
into s and u, as: ^uia^S^^j to be contained; «^l.
A^tp^y to make to be contained, to retain; ei^ibqSp^f
to rise; efigunSn)^, to raise; ^d^wn^rp^, to rettam;
^d^Hdrp^, to turn, or make to go back.
4. Some intransitive verbs, whose roots end in dj,
form transitive or causal verbs by inserting #ar, as:
urriudn)^, to run; undjff^^rp^, to make run, (as the
water;) arrujdrp^, to become dry; &rriuffSr£tp^, to
make dry,
VERBS FoicMEO FROM NOUNS.
1. Verbs are formed from nouns by adding to them
u(B£p^ for the intransitive, and uQfi^dtp^ for the
transitive; if the noun end in th, th is dropt, thus: ^esat
uuQSp^, to become healed; ^€Ssuu(Bf^^«)4^, to heal;
^iBQj^[T€if,uuQSp^, to become glad; ^PiQpnei^uuQ^^
£(p^, to make glad.
2. Intransitive verbs are formed from nouns of guali"
ty, by adding 4^Spffi, to become, and ^f}6^drp^, to be,
as: ^esawnStpsi, to become healed; ^essiDrruSi^Sp^,
to be healed, ^c Observe that there is a difference in
th^se forms.
3. Transitive verbs are formed by joining the verbs
^a^pSf^ umS9^^P^9 or Qe'djdy)^, to the nouP/
ADJECTIVES. 81
as: g€SSftDn&,§ArD^, to heal; m^^^O^diSp^f or m^^
wue&sf^dpffi, to cleanse, to make dean; G^/r^^n^
Qs^diScp^, or QftT00iiihu€SBr^£v[>^, to praise, 6fc.
4. Transitive and intransitive verbs are formed of
Sanscrit nouns ending in j^ib, by dropping this syllable,
and adding Ssdp^, as:
Causal.
^tijfresnb, medUatum; S fj^^'^^^^^ff^
4..e^^4r,^,ton^Uateatlnng. [ ^^.^^^HlL;
€ij^€(5nh, word; ) €U6^€^u6&dp^,totnake
€ijff6f^&dip^, to speak a thing, y another speak a thing,
SaJSik^'io M^. \ ^'^^"^'^^^^P^. to enUghten.
s^aQj^rro^ih, joy; > ^(BQ^tro^udsip^, to
^4BQf^€^sdrp^, to be glaJL > make glad.
SECTION XXXIII.
(G. § 3^, 40, 41.)
AdJecttTes and AdTerbs.
The fourth part of speech in Tamil is ^./f^Os^friOg
gwiUJying or descriptive word, referring either ta nouns
or verbs. In the former case we call them adjectives,
in the latter, adverbs.
ADJECTIVES
Are variously fonned from nouns denoting giia%.
1. By adding the relative participles 4)«ir} or sLm€ir
82 ETYMOLOGY.
to them, as: Mmih, length; ierriDrr^ST, i^€a^en€(r,hng ;
Qaasibj mercy; ®ir&&t£irr€6T} ^ffs&cjpenerr, mercifid, S^c,
They always precede the noun which they qualify,
without any change, as: £6aiDrr€crQ&iTeOf a long stick ;
QtT&3(jpefT6mD€^pQSfy a merciful ma% ^c.
2. If the nouns denoting quality end in U), this letter
is often dropped and the remainder of the word used
adjectively, as: from ^^^ih, purity; Sr^^^if^iuib, a
clean heart; f^rre^ihf sgirituality ; ^necrGunffemuif spi-
ritual food; npih, the Offside; qvouQurT(fi^&T, an external
thing,
3. Nouns ending in a vowel, are often used as adjec-
tives without any change, as : iDGSiL^&srreoih, the rainy
season; urTGs>tt)!ieoihy a stony ground.
4. Some nouns ending ia thq, and /b^, change the ih
and /fe, respectively«iiM u^nd ^, and become adjectives,
as: ®(5d)q, trcwi; &(§uLi&Q&(TeOj an iron rod; u>(§^,
me^^dne; U)(j^^^u6S)u, a medicine hag.
5. Some nouns ending in &.6S)U), or &€isnDj change
these syllables into ®iu, and become adjectives, as : Osrr
QGSiWy crudty; Osrri^ujiDeisrsTy a cruel mind; OU(§esnD,
greatness; QuffmiDosOy a large mountain; ®6sf6o>u), sweet-
ness; @6(^ujQ^fTeOf a pleasant word.
In some instances only & is rejected, as : Qud^&iQ&tT
uihy great anger; Quit^GSun in certain connexions, drops
its last syllable, and lengthens its first vowel, thus : Qu
fTiresiff, great desire,
6. A few words are naturally adjectives, as : ueo, va-
rious; ^eOf some; thio, or fB€0€0, good; Gutr^, common;
ADVERBS. 83
i\^, new; thus: ^easGf^a&r, some fruits; iBp^essnh,
good diqHmtionf S^c,
7. Sometimes relative participles of the past tense
are used adjectively, as: Q&Ci^tDuib, a corrupt tree; Q^
^pi£^aib, a dead beast, &fc,
ADVERBS
1. Are naturally such, as:
§€u, iS6of , ^ much,
2. Are formed from nouf^s of quality by afiixmg the
verbal participle ,gtu, or the ipfiiiitive ^<5 of the verb
^ifpS^t AS : from (?<s/ruu), anger; QsnuubniieuiB^n^, he
came angrily; m^gfi, a good thing; fB€br(Sf&^Qffrr&sf^
e&Tj he spoke well, ^c,
3. Some infinitives are used« Adverbially, as: ^i^,
to join; ^eufra&remUoj^tTffSeiT, they came together;
lS&, to be much; lEasQsaQ^pn^, he gone much; Qmeo
€0, to be soft ; Qu>eO€OfBi^^rT^, he walked softly or slowly ;
^&^^^>]to be joined; ^(fii^^^A^^Cufr® f <% went
€f>(!^uuu,) ^ ' cpdjuuL.,) iraerr, I together.
The particle SLih is added to some of the above
mentioned words, as: iSa€i^&iGan6^^n^, he was very
angry; ^rreoeifthdu^^dif, he spoke much.
84 SYNTAX.
CHAPTER III.
SECTION XXXIV.
(G. § 42.)
The Tamtilians do not treat of Syntax specially, but
connect the chapter respedting it {Qs^rrioeo^smnh) with
Etymology. They make three principal parts of a sen-
tetice, viz. er^«i;n'(Ii or s§0^iT, beginning, head, which
we call nondnatwe or subject; Q€^ajuu(BGun((^, the
object; and ucueftr, end, condusion, which expresses the
finite verb. The words which depend upon or refer to
either of these, are called «^69>L.(?m/Ttf isdr.
GENERAL RULES- OP ARRANGEMENT.
Both subject and object always {nrecede the finite verb
or u(U6&r, And the latter (dwmfs concludes the sentence, as:
jiyQ;6&r6r65r6J«riui9L^^fr6ftr, ht struck me. All words depend-
ing upon the nominative and verb precede them respective-
ly ; and these dependent words are placed nearer to, or far-
ther firom their principal, according to their relative impor-
tance.
The Adjective alwa3r8 precedes the substantive, as:
fb€S)\uqetTS(r^€u(ri£, gracious God.
\
GENERAL RULES OF ARRANGEMENT. 85
The Noun precedes its governing participle or preposi-
tion, as: eSut^^GiDiOj vpon (he house.
The Adverb precedes the verb, as: [B^^fbi:jum9.i^^,
he sung weU*
The Infinitive precedes the governing verb, as: @^&a^
G^rr^^fr, ^ told to sit down, or to vmt.
The Negative part of a sentence precedes the Affirma-
tive part, as: ojcgeuniDfiiJ^^mDmbiBL., waJIkfimdy tnthout
slipping.
That with which a tiling is compared precedes that
which is compared with it, as: ^eued^^w jfjeu^ /kcvXjO
eue&Tf that man (is) better than this man.
The Similitude precedes that which is amilar, as: «ffaj
eusiruQuneO jtjeuetr dflr<5n'^(5^(5?65r, he shines Wee the sun.
The Number precedes that which is numbered, as : ueSr
Gi^!T€Ssi(iiD!Tia&&T, twdve trees.
The Genitive precedes tljp governing noun, as : we^fi^
€6)U.ajf§€Ssnh, the disposition of men.
The Cause precedes the effect, as: uimt^\6^QeOL{eO(ip
QBfT&^lhf grass grows by the rain, '
The Reason precedes the inference, as: aurruff^fBeOeO
€iJErrr€<5rui^fiS^Q€0^eufrurrsu(ipGS6rutT&s€SiO€i£0, God is
good; therefore He has not made sin.
The Design precedes the determination, as: m^ieu
Qears&rras^Gs^rrgfi^nufSuChudsfQu), *^ f^ui eat rice in
order to preserve life.
The Condition precedes the consequence, as: tf/rutStl
L^tT^^rreuniu, thou shall die, if fhjou eatest,
c2
7^
} BTNTAX.
SECTION XXXV,
(G, § 43.)
1. The nominative and its verb must agree in gender,
number and person, as :
^Qj&TQ9rTeo^£(n/etTf she says.
mtTihQunQeunih, we shall go,
waiBis^euefrii^^pGST, ike trees grow.
The pronouns are oflen omitted ; but when the verb
does not point out the person the pronoun must be
retained, thus : iiQurraGeuessQib, thou must go.
Names of superiors may have the honorific form,
thus: ufir/Tuo'6OT(?«5=n"65r,65)/T, Chdsaid,
2. The nominative is often used for the accusative,
as: n^^&fkQ&rrQ^prT^tr, he gave a book.
In personal nouns, the nominative is also used for the
genitive or sixth case, as: fD€i^pn,^€BisfihOurrsO€OrTp^,
the TuUwre of man (is) bad.
3. Tvro or more nominatives in the same sentence,
if they are of the same gender^ must be connected by
£.(/), added to each, thus:
i\(§L^^{heiO$fts^\huni^^fise(Tf men and women sung.
Here both are &.\nfr^Qem.
@€i)rrtu&is^{b^f6(5)!i&er^th^i^ssuuiLt^6^, the stables
and horses were destroyed. Here both are ^oofBoenof.
fL(jL//t^Q£93r and ^<Soi6Q6m nouns therefore cannot be
united with sub in the same sentence, and if both are
to be specified, two sentences must be formed, thus :
FIRST CASE. 87
U)6i^^ff^ipih^rTfrae(T^0&5irT&^u)^t^{E^Q5r, men petisked,
ako the horses perUhed; or the whole sentence must
receive a new form, thus: iD6<^^h&en^^esiri&Q&Tn(B^^
a^nnaea, the men perished with the horses,
4. Nouns of the same gender, in whatever case, thus
connected by £.(£>, may drop the slil, become nomina-
tive in form, if not so already, and add er^ueufraen to
the last noun, if the nouns are enun^evsissf, and ermu&sieu
<s6yr, if they are ^^ofSoeov. This terminating verbal
noun must then be put in that case which the con-
nected nouns had before it united them, as :
^prTLb^6uaQerr6sru6iJ!fa&TUfr€UQQ^dj^nffs.err, Adam and.
Eve sinned,
ajrTaQafTq@QajrreunQ€^€sru6ufraQerTjii€Sii^0^rifr, he caUed
James and John.
QurTGsr QeuetTefi uSft^ihOuGsru&sieuaQsrT&QsrressrQQjiBpTT^,
he brought gold, silver, and iron.
5. Instead of expressing aU the nouns with &U)
or CT^ueufraetTy &c., in order to express only one or
two and signify that the rest are understood, unite, in
the nominative case, the nouns that are to be expressed,
with (ip^€Orr€crQjffaetT or (ip^eSiueufra&T if they are ^lunr
^Q6m, and with (ip^€\)fr€ST&si€Lia€fT or (jpp€6tu6s>6uaGfT if
they are .JVoopSeiessr, as :
s'rr^pds[(ip^€\)fT9Si€ufraefr6uikpnfra€(T, Sdttdn and the rest
came,
QurTd!r(ip^€O[r0sresiQjaer}€6c(Q, there is gold and such other
things,
(ippeo is a noun ; ^€sres)Qjam is a verbal noun, form-
ed of cg€isr the relative participle of <^<ij)Siy and the
8S STIfTAX.
pronominal termination €s>€us&t. The literal meaning
then is, *^ those things in which gM is the begtnmng.^^
Any noun which is common to the whole class to which
(tp^€Ofr€sr or (ipp€8iu refers, may take the place of €s>€u
s&T and ei7/r<£B6iT, thus:
^^q^pp€OiT€sriB^^€Ssriaa€nurreSscr^aSiO€i£i), hoe and
the other good dispositions are not to sinners.
6. If the nominatiTes of the three persons occur
in one sentence, the first has the preference and
governs the verb, as: m^ihiS(§ih^eugfiih€uiBQ^tTib, I,
thousand he came; thus also, Hqth^eu^^Q^rrdsFGeHir
«Qr, thou, and he said.
SECTION XXXVI.
(G. § 44.)
1. The 2d or accusative • case is required by all
transitive verbs, by those verbal participles which are
used as our prepositions, [see Sec. xi. 6. (2).] and by
the comparing particle Ou/reO, as:
^6iJ6i6snu@iui3QGSt^, I sent him.
^f(^iD&n^\n^GSip&^^^^uQuS^n^&Tf they spoke eonr
ceming the charity business.
^euiT&eierTGSLLQuQurTi^^, he went away from them.
uiLu,€sa^esif^^3r^fSu>4c8i^ad^p^, there is a toaU round
the dty.
4V«o)^uC?u/r60@^Q/fS(G'd£l(Su<$um{5jD^i this dho has pe-
rished like that.
THIRD CASE. S9
•
2. The Dominatire is sometimes used for the geni-
tive (see Sec, xxxv. 2.)
3. Qs'i^pffi, to approachj to join, has sometimes the
accusative, sometimes the thirds and sometimes the
seventh case, thus :
^QjeuBtr^Qs'friB^n'^, he approached her,
ufreSsQ€rr{rQu.Q^mrf(§, join not vjith sinners,
sBLffpQ^niBQpmhj we arrived at the village.
SECTIOrC XXXVII.
(G. § 45.)
1. The 3d case is used to denote the instrument or
cause, as:
&€i5r^pa€iisrurr^, he saw with the eye,
^ajoj^^^L^(tfi€ifSfL.rrMuuiLu^t the toater-pot was made
by the potter.
Also virhen one thing is made out of another, this
case must be used, thus: Qiprr^umsioeonjpQs'iiajuuC.
1.^, the image was made out of stone.
2. When formed with €fiQ, this case signifies tmt-
on, harmony i thus :
SLeos^QprrQL^iiSesis^tBffiQjtT^Qcunih, we shall lite in har"
mony with the world.
When it signifies together with, Oil- is often added
thus :
(?ffi(f^uqiL.G<0T (diiC-.u) qG^&(i5(§a^ih, together vnih fire
wiU be stnoke.
90 SYNTAX.
3. All verbs denoting union require this case, thus :
SL^Q^Gt^s^t^Q^ibf we joined you.
atT^Of^rTGL.iDa^€^p^G^n^ptrfrse(r, they joined one fiece
of wood wUh another.
SECTION XXXVIII.
(G. §46.).
The 4th or dative case is required : —
1. By verbs that will admit "to" or "for" after them
in English, as:
@0'L/un'/T^^Lid#6S)^(?<s/r(S^^n'6sr, he gave alms to beggars,
Sn6SA^QQj€i£\)Qa'djprr€m, he labored for hire.
Q^^^Qjih^netr, he came for this purpose.
Datives in the latter sense often add ^^ the infinitive
of ,^£n)§if thus :
[BLD&&fTaiDi?0f^niT, he died for us,
2. By the intransitive verbs, Qurrdcp^, to go, desii^s
^cosij to be obtained, s^ibueSsdcp^, to happen, ®u&i^Srp^,
to he merciful, uiuuuQ^ip^, to fear, as :
Q&-mGsruCu€m^^p,SuGurT^&sr, he went to Madras.
£(!^<ss)uQiU€^s^a£es)L.^p^, I have found grace, or grace
has been obtained by me,
^euQ^a^^^GifUQffiLueS^p^, he has been afflicted,
Gi6crs£{j{Eif§ib, be merciful to me,
G^€u@ia,§uuujuu(B, fear Crod,
3. By the defective verbs, slgSst®, there is; GeueesfQih^
FOURTH CASE. 91
it is necessary; ^,§Lb, it is fit; and their negative forms,
Qi^Q£0, QojdsiQeu^eoeusOf and psrr^, as:
€T€^3^^^&a^€$i5[(B, I have sorrow, or to me is sorrov),
^laa^a^uuGSurLScOQjBC, you have no money,
sii€Saan[r^s,§uu^^uu€SG[thG6iJ€ixsf(Bu>f the cooly wants
ten fanams,
Qihp^^€u^&^(SQjQj6rT6if(SunQ6U€&siQ€u^€OQ£0, SO many
persons are not necessary for this business,
@^SLesr&^^^^U), this suits thee.
i^ihiss)^iL6i^§f!^a^0pan^, calumnies are not becoming to
men,
4. By all adverbs, and adjectives that will admit 'Ho"
after them in English, thus :
&iT[T^rr€ifa^6SQarT§iDnsLj(SumS(fi;iTae(Tf they speak in
opposition to the king,
uunun^€Sii^\ij((f^^S^f>^^n)^^f^^\ur\mii'Qs^\h, do a-
greeably to God*s holy wiU,
A(!^^^&^a^i^^iSuiDm6(i^sa€S(§ihL^€urr'jjrTa, desire to be
near to the Lord,
jy^/b<5ffc^n"ffljr^«foriL.Qfijr63)iu#tf^^^/T/T, he suffered apunr
ishment compensatory to that.
It will be observed that the adverbs are here formed
from nouns of quality by adding ^ib to them.
5. By the particles £(^, under, Gidgo, over, 6^, be--
hind, (ip^, before, and by the verbs composed of them,
as:
^es>^uu60es)a&^s£QL^Qua(B, throw it under the board,
^€i>ibui6jsi)a^GtD€S(i^ikp^,the water was above the mountain*
^a&neo^^&)^u6^, after that time.
^pp^§(tp&s[Qm, before that.
"92 srr^TAX.
^euni£s^&£ifiuut^fuG€ueBS[(Bu)f we must suhmit to God,
fheO€06ijfra^s,§ui3^Qs'eo^{as&rf follow after goodpeo-
pk.
If such verbs be transitive they require of course both
the accusative and dative cases. The simple particles
are often used also with the oblique case.
6. By substantives denoting Unut, region, ramk, or
reUUion, and some others which admit "to" after them
in English, as :
^(!P^0!nh@iE^G^s'00ir)^srioQsotuntiS,§&S^^^, the sea
is the boundary of India,
09dsf€Sfu\Li^ess(^$^^§ QppQs pnfyau>urTi^(£i§^£^p
^, soiUh of Madras is Tranquebaar,
^6ufireT€sr&,§(ip^6i)n'efitu(rijS^d(fi;fr, he is my superior,
@6ijQGrr6(5r&,§^^rTUJf she is my mother,
qrpfkis^^£^6uQ€m€<5rA,§u6^iu€iSTiO€0, he who backbites is
not a friend to me,
£kaGstT&isff^SiS^^QiBS^^amtTiiS(^i3fra€iT(Ta, he ye
friends to us.
Observe that the nouns here followed by ^\u, are not
nouns of quality. They are not therefore formed into
adverbs, ^tu belongs, in these cases, to the following
@(l^s£n)^; and <^u5(f^&dff)^ is a predicating verb, as
will be more fully explained in the proper place.
7. The dative is used to express the comparative de-
gree, as: ®pir)i§j>i^Quff^, that (is) greater than this,
8. Two dative cases express the particle between, as :
@^^^ihj^^if)^U)i£,§{hj^Gd^^iun^(jp€SisQ, there is great dif-
ference between this and that.
FIFTH AND SIXTH CASES. d3
SECTION XXXIX.
(G. § 47.)
The 5th case or ablative of sepaaration and motion is
required,
1. By intransitive verbs that will admit "from,"
after them in English, as:
&fiErf6of(E}^^68r or 8fir/fasf6&rj:iirfiE}i£,g)69r or eBi^<e^^Agii
StaS^dfT, he removed fivni the village,
^QsovSeSd^ik^ or posouSeafdsrgfiiLySnpni^iEpffi, the hmt
hung down from the head,
2. With «./&, it is used to express the comparative
degree, as:
^f&ih^SiOiDioeS^, this (is) finer than that.
®fB^LDQ£ou5e;su)^fBpiDG£oQuff^, thot mounioin (is) great-'
er than tftis.
J^ote. The oblique case, having the ^/T/f 65)io @6&r, must not
be confounded with this fifth case.
SECTION XL.
(G. § 48.)
The 6th or genitive case.
1. Nouns which are the inherent or acquired property
of other nouns, require those other nouns to be in the
genitive, as:
^€U(i^€i5it^iu^€6snh, his disposition.
fBih(tp€SiL^tuu€i5f5(ihj our money,
m6of^£r^@uj^L|, the nature of men.
94 SYNTAX.
2. Nouns which express the constituent parts of
other nouns may be in the genitive, as:
QiBsoeo^^uesiu, a heap of paddy,
dfSaOpQjfr&€rfes>L.tua-es>u, the congregatien of Christians,
Note, The use of the Tamil genitive being restricted
within these very narrow limits, in innumerable instan-
ces the English particle "oP' and the genitive case of
other languages cannot be translated by it They may
be so translated only when they correspond exactly to the
Tamil genitive as described above. When they do not
thus correspond they must be rendered in other ways.
On this point, see large Grammar, A pp. 37, page 242.
3. When two or more genitives belong to one noun,
the genitives cannot be united by the copulative con-
junction as in English. We cannot say,
Gifihj^^esuDj the nature of the red, green, and blue colours.
But the noun to which the genitives belong must
either be repeated as many times as there are genitives,
thus:
^€>)^^^€6)L.iuf^€tr6SiUimh, the nature of the red^
green, and blue colours.
Or the genitives must all be changed to nominatives,
and the verbals eresFueunaetr or ci^uesieuaea must be
inflected in the genitive case and added to the last
nominative in the series, thus :
^€uumjuff€S)^ii€0QiLGsru€6)QjSfr^6SiU{u^^€SH£i, the nch
tare of the red, green, and blue colours.
the nature of the red
and other colours.
SEVENTH CASE. 95
Or the whole sentence may receive another form,
thus:
^6uuqs,§ih u#60)<F^^d)^60^^<z^£r) ^Q0p^^€ts>iD, the
nature which belongs to the red, green, and blue colours.
If but one or two of the nouns are to be expressed,
and the rest understood, (ip^eSiu or (ipj^eorrecr may be
used as before explained, thus :
^6St6^u), or
4. The nominative is often used for* the genitive when
it can be used without ambiguity, as:
^eu^^iLQi^uQurrGesf^, I went to his house,
5. The oblique case is often used for the genitive,
thus: %
HiO€Sdffeu€6sr€SfSfib, or )
HeoeS€;5r^€u€^esNthy or S the colour of the grass,
qeoeS^€CiUiUQjeBBi€SS[thf )
Note. The oblique case is also used where the geni*
tive cannot be. For a full definition of its several
powers see Beschi's high Tamil Grammar, Chap. ii. viii.
Mr. Rhenius has given a few partial examples on paae
132 of his Grammar.
SECTION XLI.
(G. § 49.)
The 7th case or ablative of place.
1. It is required by nouns which express things exist-
ing in others as a component part of them, thus: eoauS
96 SYNTAX.
4^u^0ioeS(Teos&t^ii^^£&sfip€(sr, the fingers are in the
hand; or simply existing in others without forming a
component part of them, as: ^srr^^^ct^i^^^ipup
€Si€us€(TUPo&£^p€JST, ihe Mrds fly in the air.
2. It is required by verbs signifying to be, to put, to
come J to ask J to inquire, S^c, as :
^6U€t^i^^^eCLS,§{Bpu€SS[(ip€SGrQ, he has much money.
St€U6br^Gsr6udO^[TEiSG£mDU^^€i^i^0^G:>€6)eu^p[r^, he
put his clothes near the tree.
€T &sr 61^1^0^ 60 QLithprr^f he came to m£.
^«Q>i7a5€oPL.^^eO€Q?dFmfu(?u/ru)| we leiU inquire qf the
gentleman.
€T6FU[)iT6i^u.0$^QaiLLjr&sefr, they asked the master.
SECTION XLII.
(G. § 50.)
The 8th or vocative case with or without the inter-
jection <^, or €^, always commences the sentence) as :
^ u£r/ruir(J«jr, O God! €^ @mr^rrQ€uSffQaiLa, O king
may you hear! ^e6>ffQuj, O Sir!
SECTION XLIII.
(G. § 52.)
The present tense is used,
1. To express the present time, as: ®uGu(Ti^jS!a€0&
au>n-a5($<s^(?rp€sr, I am now troMed,
2. To express a state or aottoQ, which eiifll^or acta*
at all times, or which 13 always th^ nature ofa, th^g or
persoA^as:
uan'ua€(fi(Ssd(fr^n; Crod exists.
u>6i^pfru(rQJ€^Q^djd(l!^framf men sin, viz. at all times.
QpeijQSf9rT€u(p€0(rs^€SipfLiih^n&iQi(fi^, God 9W^a^ off
warUh,
3. It is also used for the future, to express eSesureif,
u e. quickness, haste, thus : if a person calls me, I an-
swer iBJi^eu^Ofp^i I come, whereas I am to be un-
derstood as saying tBrr^^^SmDfTfUQJd^Qeu^, I shall
presently come.
Thus also, SuQuiTi§^@a66sru.nibj>i^a!TiT^€S)^eiJiT^s
^dtp^, I shall now read the second chapter; lit. I now
read^ 8fc.
SECTION XLIV.
(G. § 53.)
The past tense is used,
1. When the past time is to be expressed, as:
^Qj^Qj^rr^, he came.
tBn^Si€ufrs€iefrM€&S[Qi^^, I saw them.
2. In like manner with the present, the past is
sometimes used for the future to express eSesarei^, i. e.
haste, quickness, thus: I say fBn^SL€isrOi-^, I have
done eating, when I am to be understood as saying "I
shaU soon have done.'*^
3. It is also used for the future to express ti^,
c3
dS SYNTAX.
f. e. greaifmif fr^pseney, thus: Qmt^ffySQeo^^Qs
durr^tun^pG^^^ndj, for ^iroi/roi, hadst Aou iravetted
there by nightt thou Itadst died, instead of thou wjMut
home died.
The simple future may be used in Tamil where in
English we should use the pluperfect potential, thus:
^Quir^^rr^^^rreundj, if thou fiadst gone, Aou voouUit
have died, lit. if thou went, thou tnlt die. Observe
therefore that in the example given above — Cun^fiutr^
pQff^^frdj — ^the past tense is used for the future, as we
may use the pluperfect indicative for the pluperfect
potential, thus:
Qurr^ajFT^edQ^^prrdj, hadst thou gone, thou hadst
died, (lit, if thou went, thou didst die,) ^.
Instead of Gun^ajfT^Goi^nojndj, hadst thou gone, thou
wouldest have died, (lit if thou went, tfiou wilt die.)
SECTION XLV.
(G. § 54.)
The future tense is used,
1. To express the future time, as: tBirQfsn&^uqpu
uQQsunib, to-morrmo we shaU set out.
2. To express the present time in cases of j^eoq,
i. e. nature, habit or custom, as :
iBn-G5rps:3tOQjQ£oQ^\uQ€u^, I do carpenter^s business.
^QjesimUiSeunajfT, dost thou know himl
-3. It is used in the same way in regard to past time
RELATIVE PARTICIPLES. 99
also, viz. to express cuit<my habUy Sfc, as : (ip^O^aea:
u€0€8f^u>R'€sr&rT/f\ufyaQeni'Q^nio^€unn&&Tf instead of
Q^n^^setT, (oar) anceitors »aid various things, (i. e.
used to say.)
4. In some cases the future ^nse implies dotAt, vn-
certmniiff as :
Si€St^aais|uu^^&Os'rTG0^€lJrTf^a&T, the people say so;
meaning that the truth of what they say is doubtful.
S^fgi€^Q^Q^6usou^ffi(ipi^iD(Ti3S^&^ib, this piece of
doth will be (i. e, may be about) ten cuXnts,
SECTION XLVI.
(G. § 56.)
I. The relative participles are invariably prefixed to
nouns. They partake of the nature of adjectives; they
possess, however, the same powers as the verbs from
which they are derived. They also contain the rete-
Hve pronoun, for which in Tamil there is no separate
word, and that relative pronoun always refers to the
noun with which the relative participle is immediately
connected.
II. To ascertain the case of the unexpressed relative
pronoun we give the following rules.
1. In relative participles of intransitive and pasmve
verbs, the relative pronoun is always in the nominative
case, except when the relative participle is preceded
by a nominative of its own. Then the relative pronoun
100 flraTAx«
may be in any. cade^ except the nominttive azid aecoaif
tive,a8:
had risen,
6E€Sr, men who were created by Godjorgei km.
H^&rQ^eii&S^euifQACLjsuifi, the toay in which ^
go (is) a bad tooy.
tuosibu€SiuaauuiLueS§ib ^^^ffiumnuSfi^aSeisFp^, the
manner in which the world was createdie wonder^
2. In relative participles of transitive verbs the re-
huive pronoun may be in any case.
(1.) If the relative participle has a noun, which
it governs in the accusative, preceding it, the relative
pronoim is in the nominative case, as : s^eos^esi^uuesiiL
0^uimuiT^GTii6Onff^th&.ujfTfi»^sd(ffffr, Chd who creal'^
ed the world is high above alL
(2.) If the relative participle is preceded by a nomi-
native of its own, the relative pronoun is in the accusative
case, as: iQ^dj^GanGSSff^^fiiuecectf ihe angle which
thou modest is not right.
(3.) If the relative participle is preceded by both a
nominative and an accusative of its own, the relative pro*
fioun is in any case (nominative and accusative excepted)
which the connexion requires, as: urrirucr^SLeoa^esipu
ueat^fif^eS^ih ^ip^/fttJiDrrt^d^aS^p^, the manner in
which God created ihe]world is wonderfid.
IIL Every noon or pronoun in a sentence may bai^e
relative participles, as :
RCLATITS. PABTICIPLE8. 101
dtrutr&i6U€Of^U€8or^d(SfiT&GiT, the female devUees,
WHCh <fo 9enAee m U^ large Peroemai temple which is
tn Canjepoaramt dance before the swamff which ti
made ofgoUL
sk^piuireUii^ ^letj^ssiUiu &iLL^QeiTesi{U&esi&&Qsfr&r
eunfra&T, aU persom who love the Saviour who died
for them^ toiU keep His commandments.
IV. If more than one relative participle belong to
one noun, all the relative participles, except the last, are
to be changed into verbal participles and construed in
the same manner as the last relative participle, as: ersSst
l£fysiTa€tMu0p u!rTua^O^rTf^ff&suuu.0p&a€uiir, God
who made the innumerable stars, and who fixed them in
the greatest order, (is) Ik who is worthy to be praised.
If, however, between the relative participles thus
changed, and the noun to which they belong, long
claused should intervene, and the sense be obscured,
k is better to turn such relative participles into verbal
jioiifu than into verbal participles, affix to each verbal
noun ^fh and ^dj, and add a rdatioe participle of Sij^
^rp^, in the suitable tense, to the last verbal, with which
the noun unites, thus:
S4ueifei>a^fO€0iDG^§^€u^fraibLKiar€e(i^€Br€U(i^iTvjuy€ff§&
eStLLAu^Uftrdj^fihesiW eBs^eun^sdpeu&afffa&rrauutr
io afg€SHU^stbutTf^^(§t£tTuS(§sd^ QQiumaSfBefC^
SGi^Qiuioeon^ik0^tTfiftT^G^di^rrna€rrtra, lit fnoy all
102 srjutJkX.
praise Jaw Christ who is He that became incamaie in
this loorldf and He that gave his Ufe to atone for the
sins WHICH 00 men had committed, and He &iai a6-
t€ttned heavenli/ Miss for those thcU beHeve (in) Him,
The same method should be observed when all the
principtil relative participles have not the same tense, as :
Quai^^ib y(j60n"6B^^rT(5s^ t£(§ihp5aOajns^€^ik&Qens
Qs(rQ3iSro€S)€u&Gf^wnuS((^&dp(hiL^ffa'^astT er^csoPfp
jk^Os^eustsriutTuSff^sde^ipesr, lit. the stars which are
those things that were made in the beginning by the great
Ood, and those things that give always great benefits
to the irAabitants of the world, are an innumertMe host.
SECTION XLVII.
(G.§66.)
1. The first indefinite mood, or verbid participle, is
used for the finite verb of any tense. When a nomi-
native has more than one finite verb, the last one
only receives the personal terminations, and all the pre-
ceding verbs are changed into verbal participles. Their
tense, number and person must be determined by the
last finite verb, thus:
thfTe^OutTfJj^uuii^i'G^^n'io^Oeu^, I will go and teUso;
that is, Qu^Qeu^, dz.c.
C^nrcdBTdC^u/r^Acrr, the peons came, took hM of the
criminals, and led them to the jaU; that is, oj^ptrffseiT,
VERBi^t PARTICIPLE. 103
2. To give a peculiar emphasis to each verb in a
sentence, or to show that all the transactions were done
at the very same time, the particle s.u> may be added
to each verbal participle, and the whole be concluded
with a finite form of ^d^sdp^, or some otiier expletive,
as:
they (at the same time) beat him, reviled him, and spU
upon him.
^ffsStLQ&Q&rreisrQiSd^ih^nn&m, the enemy besieged the
fort and (at the same time) made a hideous noise,
3. Negative verbal participles, when there are more
than one, usually receive^ the &.ih, as: Qeu^ffnffOojGSij
£(f^fra&T, these villagers neither work, nor clean their &o-
dies:
ICott. To avoid ambiguity, affirmative and negative verbal
participles should not be intermixed, thus :
^eufr&etTuiTnuirst^i^^feo ^^qajrik^ ^eud^ssntfiu^Gs^
f^nffaeir. Here the verbal participles «i/t/^ and
Qffii^ might be understood as negatives because
of the following /BCQjn-mo); but they might also be
understood otherwise, especially in cases where the
sense is less apparent by the connexion. It should
be, ^^i^enmiTi^Ui, essL0{u^Q^djiliniD^ih, (BL^euniD
^th, Qurr4o€0(Tf^Qjfrs€(rrrt6^fhf{TAaefT,
4. In relating successive events in Tamil, the order
of nature must always be strictly observed. We can-
<c
104 SYNTAX.
not say, m^mitSaana€ua^iu^Ls6(6is^tTesiifiCnJifiii&^kur
fl^U)^^iQsrrQ>tf«#(?^n'<ird€?sr6^, I sent ^ toch^ and tM
him to give y&u the piafOaxnt; since I most have com**
manded before I sent, it must be f^lk^neotfiuugiit
&^jil€iJ€usariu^u60€sr^,I gave thepkmtams to die coobff
4md sent hm to ffwe (them) to you.
5. After the Tcrbal participle no new stdiject can
be introduced in the same sentence. The noun that
governs the finite verb must govern all the verbal par-
ticiples. If a new nominative is brought in, either the
isentence raiist be entirely recast, or it must be split up
mto as many sentences as there are subjects. We can-
not say :
j>l6ui^€uih^srTffanhfBua^^, he came, and the himnas weal
4m; but: j^QjfrQjfBpQupri^^ (or fi.L-G€or, or iS6&rq,) &ir
ff(uib/EL.fs^^, when (^or as soon as, or after,) ka
came, the business went on.
wrong. It may be written ^(tp^fiTih^tuninbu^
^p^^^mksenuikiv^nfr&ea, the sea roared, and the
people were afraid.
A new nominative however may be introduced after
the verbal participle, when such nominative denotes a
part of the first nominative, as :
aiLi^escr^^dsr ^€cr^aefriSiflk§iS€Ofrii^f^€s>fffq^S€0& Jyu
GuTr&0peO€Siin^^QffiT&^nfrseifT, the peopie of the lAtff
were divided; some held with ^ Jews, and some with
the Apostles.
6* From the verbal participle ^uj, of 4^fpiSff l#
VERBAL iPik&XtCIPLE. ICMf
hmsmne^ adf)erbfl axe foniied. In generaji tKoae inaiyiedir<
vttAj precede the woid. which they qualify, as: Smmesat
dsr^AttDfnbmt^m^QufTi^^t Sfwcmen nme t^y haatik^
(md weat awmf. But sometimes the; may be separated,
thus :
^es>cK»s»nuu)tTibGr^€SeGor€SSfuuf6S)^f^eiiT€^^)it, the gefh
tieman angrily rejected my petUitm.
If there be more than one adverb, &.ih must be.
added to each, either Jbefore or after ^ii, as: eunmtb
s^iumon^ihtDS€BiiD[una:\i£i!$a£dsfpffi, or €utTfbFtb9LfUBr({pu>iTU
tades>u>ii^u>rTii3(f^£^pffi, the heaoen is high and ghriou»*
7. The verbs, ©dji^jD^, Qandrrer^drp^, €U(^rp^, 6B(B
Srp^, c^Jrpjsf and QurrQdpj^ are often added as auxi-
liaries to the verbal participles of other verbs.
(!•) ®(3^^p^] if the present tense of this verb be
added to a verbal participle, the compound word will
embrace both the present and past tenses, correspond-
ing in some cases with our perfect, as:
i40^a^€s>^sOarT€iv(B€D&0fi^d(n;^, haicmg brought the
book, he k; i. e, he has brought the book,
SffniD^QarTC€Siui^QufTi6(^S((^dfr, Raman having gone
to the fort, is (there) ; t. e. Raman has gone to the fort.
If its p€ttt tense be added, the compound word ex-
presses a past time before another past time, correspond-
ing in some cases to our phtperfeet, as: ^Oma^n^m^
£^QsrrttJSs>uiBf(f^ih^rrdsr, ^fi^fir^dj^O^^^n^, haoing
gotten many riches, he was; but died poor; t. e. he had got
many rifles, bvt died poor.
If its ^ure tense be added, a past transaction in the
future with another ftitwe will be expressed, correspond-
106 SYNTAX.
ing in some cases to our second future, as: €j>^gumifi
Q(Baf^Q€Omrr€isr^nudiLt^fSlLiQu€Ssr, at one o^dock, hamg
dtiiec^ / thatt be; t. e. / JmU have dined at one o'deds.
Parts of this verb are sometimes added to verbal parti-
ciples without any meaning, thus: eT^tkf^&^n^ , herose^
is equal to crtgiBprT^; here @c$rl^rr6^ has no meaning:
Stiatdf^uQ^f^^ndsTj he ley dawn; is the same as u^f
(2.) Oanen^dipffi when added to a verbal participle
denotes the continuation of the action which is express*
ed by that verbal participle, as: ^euesur&QsnosoQ^djfu
Qiurt^€usaru€isfeafitsGstr^^d(n^naGrT, they are constdHng
to kiU hm.
Verbal participles, thus modified by the addition of
OstTsiisrQt may, by receiving the three tenses of ^f^dp
^, be farther modified in the following manner,
€ttf^aQan'€ian^($s£(ir^n'aetT, the gentlemen having (for
some time) consulted about this matteTf are (still so
consulting.) GajTTS'Q£sru6i;sresd^uSii^^S(ii;ffa€tT would
simply mean, having coTisulted, they are; i. e. they
have consulted. [See 7. (1) above.]
^euffaen0iufa'&6sru€6Cf€afifaQan'€SSti^(f^iB^Qun't£^^€una
efifiu^^uduffCTt^ih^OurT^fra&ry when they hamng
(for some time) consulted, were (still so consulting),
ten of them rose and went away. Qtun^eusBruc^eat^uS
f^ih^Ourrt^^ would mean, when they having consulted,
were, (i. e. when they had consulted,) ten went away,
/fir fBfrQetTd,§eU(§wQuiTi^£! [Brr^ ^igfaQaiTeioft^(§uQu€tr,
u)hen you come to-morrow, I having (for some time)
VERBAL PARTICIPLE. lOT
wriiten, ^U be (still so writing.) a ig fvS^uQu^
would mean, having written, I thaU be, t. e. / ahali
have written.
Q&nen^dip^ is also added to verbal participles to
denote that the agent did the thing to or for ^viueZ/'and
not for another, as :
SiGS)^OiUL£f&Qaa€isfQu^, I wrote that, (for my own
use.)
^esy^^Oa^fu^GaneiB^lL^^, I have done it, (for myself,
not for another.)
»
(3.) Qj(i^rp^, added to verbal participles, denotes the
continuance of the transaction, as: ^fk^eus^GSiLSuOutr
tgsii^&sipCSeufSeud^Sebrpffi, that word is now ftdfiUmg. The
verbal participle Qsne^Q may be inserted before a/(^
tp^i as: ^€UiTnith0S)iDiurrpff^^aQa(T€isf(ieij(i^^ff;n, He is
(until this moment) supporting us,
sd^^^nQeGipii&siPoCsu^jSdQ&rreisfQeiJd^drfft, the Lard is
(now gradually) fulfilling it,
(4.) eSQ^rp^, to leave, forsake, is added to some ver-
bal participles whose meaning can admit the idea of
leaving, forsaking. It strengthens the expression, as:
i3d!rL\{h(TGsr^Qjei6Gfiu@iuiS€StL(Su^, afterwards I sent him
away,
(5.) The past tense of ^dro^, to become, may be
added to verbal participles to denote the full accom-
plishment of the action, as:
Ms^esiiD^piTtiSpta;, hast thou finished cooking?
ihnGsr^eo^SPQff-dj^rruS^g)!, I have finished doing that,
Qffdjj^ and ^€^id0j^ stand here for the finite verb,
1^ SIW^AX,
and the meaning of due last aen^ence ia tBaasfetsifiiQmvj
9p^ ^^<^fiSipjpi^ IdicLit; U isfinkhed,
(6.) GunQdpjp also, when added to verbal partieiples«
ofjben denotes the full ajccomplishment of the action
expressed by those verbal participles. In such case9
it has the force of ^vSfig)!, thus :
^ikpaafr^^^GSi^Qiut^^uGumLGL^dsr, I have fancied
wriiing that letter.
^€u^&^a OarrQsaGeuf^t^iu auejsar^^fr^^uOuntL
Gu.^, I have completely settled the debt tohich I owed
hxm,
QunQdp^ sometimes merely adds intensity to the
sense of the verbal participle with which it is joined.
Often it is only an expletive^
SECTION XLVIII.
(G. § 57.)
1. 77^6 2d indefifu^e mood, (our subjunctive) only
supposes that the action may take place, and mi^st ther^
fore always be followed by the future tense, as :
iea^fn^QanQuGud^, if you come I shall give.
iBmb^iBGaGurr^€OGiDrrffihQj(§ih, if we go there evil untt
hefal us.
2. The Zd indefinite mQod is a subjunctive, with a{-
though, referring to past or present time, as : ^^ay/rrf^iu/r
djiBUtE^^^&s(&iaG(r4)f6u6Si[reSsr€urr^aa€S$0Q£Oj abkough
he walked righteously, the people did not believe (on) him.
3. The 4th indefimfe mood is a subjunctive, witb <i^
INDEFINITE MOODS. 109
thoughy referring to future time, as : L\€Sdu.n>^n^ihQun
€un,^, akhough a tiger should lie (there) he t(?iU go.
These 34 and 4th indefinite moods must be carefully
distinguished. The former is certain; the latter is «g}-
pqsUious, thus : unnua^u/fsr^pirrTiiSd^pjr^Ui implies not
.that God is holy, but only supposed to be so. We
must say uarruirecruif^^pirrruSif^^ih, i. e. although God
19, or was hobf, 8fc,
4. If the past or future time is to be particularly
expressed in the subjunctive mood, <^^io, or «^e^,
may be affixed to any person or number of those
tenses, as :
GsruthojuiLfTiLun^, if they Jicid comidered their duHeM
this affliction would not have happened,
iBrTih^fQ^tbGeurriDrri^p (or ^dfi) ^eiisSajwenrriTfrtDeSdj^
s^iDtT, if we do righteousness, will not happiness
camel
«^@«o, the 2d indefinite mood of ^p^, means, if it
be, and should be used in that sense alone. It cannot
properly be used to express the disjunctive conjunct
tion but.
SECTION XLIX.
(G. § 58.)
Tlie 5th indefinite tnood, (our infinitive) is used,
1. To denote purpose, end, as: Q^neoedoiffiQ^^, I
came to inform.
If the infinitive is not immediately followed by the
110 SYNTAX.
finite verb, it is belter, for the sake of perspicuity, to
use, instead of the infinitive, the future relative partici-
ple with ui^L^^, or some other particle denoting pur-
pose or endf as :
€ysrTS^u&5iU6SiiuuGurT€i>Q6U€SSi^S(2p^f I count rich-
-es 08 dung that I may obtain heaven,
2. It is used to denote time, or condition, with respect
40 the past. It may then be rendered by Mfic«, as, uken,
whibt, thus :
QQiusrfBrrpfrQs'nioeoi^Se^frGsLit^trfrs&T, whilst the Lord
Jesus spoke, the disciples heard,
^uui!^vS(t^&s^€u^cr^€(siGs=diairr^, since it is so, v^uU
witthe do?
Note. This use of the infinitive being rather ambiguous, it will
often be better to use the proper relative participle with a parti-
cle denotingtiine,-or to use the ablative of a verbal noun formed
from the root, thus: fHQtusrfiir^irO^ir&tarOutrQ^j^j or Q^ir
car«iLS«rL/,'OrO^/r^jir«D«iiJf^ instead «f giQiusrjBir^TO^tr
SECTION L.
Verbal nouns are nouns endowed with verbal energy.
They are of two kinds; see section xxvii.
FIRST CLASS.
Verbal nouns formed from the roots of verbs exert the
powers of the verbs from which they are derived, thus :
urf«^^iorrafBL.^^60 (or fBu^sco or iBi^a^eo) i^iuniu
(tp&retrffi, lit, a walking holUy (is) reasonable.
VERBAL NOUNS. Ill
fesiUi€snu^Q^dj^io (or Gs^djiuio) uafTUff^&^sSQarrf^
wn^axgi, the doing of eml (is) hostile to God.
Since they are rumns, they may be put in any case re-
quired, thus :
f€(!>u>€Siaji^Qs'djpQeo€d(§thu(2€iJG6BrL.tTih, you must not de^
sire the doing of evU,
f€snDGSnu^QiFdjp€0rTpbOs(BeU(f^j ruin comes by doing eml,
f€i5iiD0s>tuS^Qs^\Lpip^^^Sr, fear the doing ofeml.
^prrfrseiT, while Jie was going to the city, the peons
caught him, (lit. in his going to the city, fyc.)
^€u€SifBpuOun\besiiuS^ G&rreo^GSistiSeo ^nfLiuoj^ poeo
QiDeoeSi§(Bf5i^, while he was telling that He, the thunder-
hoUfell upon his head.
Rem, 1. Verbal nouns formed from roots by adding
uLf) Gif, aeisis and gshd, do not, in general, retain the
verbal power, thus :
6T6sru{9L(jq, my learning,
iB^fB^,SflfS€>^, mudi knowledge,
fi.6i7g^60)L.(UfEL.a6O6E, youT conduct,
^6u^€s^L^iuQun(n;€S)U>, his envy.
Rem, 2. The verbal noun in ^eo is united with ^ih,
(3d pers. neut. fut. of <^<^(D^) and used as our may,
in asking or giving permission, thus :
im^GurT&eorriDiT, may I go?
i^Qurrseonih, you may go.
ffe5TiB&efT&^&iQ€(T€UQ€0mb, the people may come in.
112 SYNTAX.
SECOND CLASS.
Personal and neuter verbal nonns, inasmttch as they
are derived from rdoHve participles by the addition of
-pronominal terminations, are equivalent to a rehtiite
participle f and a pronoun, thus :
(BL^aSroQj^ 13 equal to tBL^&Sro ^eu^.
iBL^a£fO€ufrs&r, „ „ „ (BusMp ^eufra&r,
i&c. &c. through all the genders of the third
person singular and plural of the verbal nouns
of the three tenses. See section xxvii. 2.
A thorough knowledge of the. simple rules laid down
in section xjlvi. in regard to relative participles, will
enable us to analyse these verbal nouns, in every
situation in which they occur, and give us ability to
use, with precision and power, this most important and
beautiful portion of the Tamil verb.
As relative participles are always connected with
nouns, and verbal nouns of the second class consist
of a relative paartidple and a (pro) noun, the rules given
in section XLvi. are strictly and tnoaria% applicable
to these verbal nouns. We shall therefore subdivide,
and exhibit these verbal nouns, just as the relative parti-
ciples have already been subdivided and exhibited.
First. Verbal nouns formed from the relative partici-
pies of t^rofwifive and passive verbs.
VERBAL NOUNS. 113
The rule is as follows : "in relative participles of in-
transitive and passive verbs, the relative pronoun is
always in the nominative case, except when the relative
participle is preceded by a nominative of its own.
Then the rekttive'pronoun may l)e in any case required,
(the nominative and accusative cases excepted.^') See
sec. XLvi., IL 1.
1. Verbal iiouns (formed from the relative participles
of intransitive and passive verbs) whose rehtke prmoun
is in the nondnaiiPe. Of these,
*(1.) Verbal nouns formed from relative participles
of intrdnsUwe verbs.
^^QaQundrooj^eroj^, who goes there, lit. he who goes
there (is) who?
^^ is equal to ^€u4r he ; and Qurrmp is the relative parti*
ciple, containing its own relative pronoun ^^who** in the nomina-
tive case, according to rule.
QtTu3^^ii£ifi€6HDvSG€0 6mun'€BBnhQurT€u^ uneuwrraS^^
lb, traoeBkng on Sunday is sin; lit. thai which shaU go
Journeying &n Sunday ihaU he sin.
'siik^3^(Bihu^n)iSfO!B^6ufrs&T tbioeoemaea, those who
have been bom in thatfamHy (are) excellent persons.
s&T, sudi Mngs (are) those which are suitable to
his nature; i. e. such things are suitMe, Sfc.
(2.) Verbal nouns formed from relative participles
of passive verbs.
* In the examples that follow, the relative pronoun^ which
is contained in the relative participle in Tamil, is printed in the
English, for tlie sake of distinction, in Rwton letters.
114 SrNTAX.
luiT, have not those who were sent by me come to ycul
As has been mentioned above, when soch relative
participles are preceded by a nominative of their own,
the relative pronoun may be in any case required, (the
nominative and accusative cases excepted.) Therefore
we have,
2. Verbal nouns (formed from the relative partici-
ples of intransitive and passive verbs) whose rdaiwe
pronoun may be in any case, except the nominative and
accusative. Of these,
(1.) Verbal nouns formed from relative participles
of intransitive verbs.
^, without doubt the Lord Jems has ascended to heaven ;
lit. that in which the Lord Jesus ascended to heaven (is)
that in which doubt is not.
vfiCjQutrm^ ; jgi is equal to ^JP \ vfiCjQuirar jg the
relative participle, and since it ia preceded by a nominative of its
owrn, viz. fSiQiu^jftr^iTy jts relative pronoun may be in any
case except the nominative and accusative. If for ^^'^ ^thaty^
we supply the words *^that action^'*'' the sense will be clear ; thus :
that action in which the Lord Jetus ascended to heaven is true,
iBn^&BL(§s^u(2urT€u^iii^s'iuLon95^srT^(uu>eoeOf it is noi
certain that IshaU go to the village; lit. that in which
/ shall go to the vittage is not a certain thing.
Note, In the two examples given above, the verbals are neuttr
verbals. Personal verbals, formed from relative participles of
verbs which, while intransitive, express an aeHon^ are never (to
our knowledge) preceded by a nominative of their own-, their
relative pronoun is therefore alwavs in the nominative case.
]
VERBAL NOUNS. 115
See firtt 1. (1.) above. 'BkvA personal^ as well as neuter verbals,
formed from relative participles of purely neuter verbs, (i. e. verbs
which, while, intranflitive, express no action) are often preceded
by a nominative of their own, thus :
Q^ff[§h&enuffmfij^etr€rT€tjn&e(T, the angels (are) those
to whom hoHness is; i. e. they are holy.
iifyA&T^esrdioeafr^eijn&QiTf lit. ye (are) those to whom
love is not.
^€Si€ijaeir^ihueSuuOpuui^t how shaU those things hap-
pen! lit. that in which those things shall happen (is)
how?
(2.) Verbal nouns formed from relative participles
of passive verbs.
iu^u)na^(y)ajfr^^uuu.<S€U€isr(iibt lit. like thai in which
the snake was lifted up in the wilderness, the son of man
also must be Hfted up.
Note. In this example the verbal is a neuter verba). Pergonal
verbals formed from relative participles of passive verbs are never
(to our knowledge) preceded by a nominative of their own ; their
relative pronoun is therefore always in the nominative case;
See firtt I . (2.) above. They sometimes appear to be preceded
by a nominative, thus :
QarrfifO&sf ^u^i&uuuusu&sr Qs=^^uQun^€^, here
QstT^fp^ stands for QstTirirp^GeO, and the meaning is,
he who toas beaten hy KdUdn died.
Inflection of Verbal Nouns.
But these verbals, while they thus exert verbal ener-
gies, are Tumns ; and consequently they may be inflected
in any case required, thus:
116 SYNTAX.
Verbal nouns (formed from relative participles of
(1.) intransitive, and (2.) passive verbs) whose rekUive
pronouns are in the nominative case.
(1.) ^iBQsQurrSro6ij€usarsSnudQ, catthim who goes there,
I fvUl give alms to those vvho shall come to me,
fjpfisrreo^^eoiBL.iBp&sieiiaQerT^Qs'tTio^ibj tell the things
which occurred in former times,
^&iQsfin)SrD€iifraei^a(§€Uifi6Snuaan'tLQ, show the way to
those who stand there,
tDet^^(!5^en§^i^®(§uu(SSip0Qp6U€mf6£(fji;rrf Gfod knows
that which is in the heart of man.
(2.) ^^arr^aetTrreot^aauuiLueueussTf^^iuaarra^acfifg
€u^Lb66i6u0^aQa{TG(T6(nDn'tLi^iT^, no one wiU employ
as a servant him who has been beaten by the auihorities,
QurruUi^Qeo Qs^rreoii^uuiLu.GSiQja^a^ tBrr^Q^eSGafvCB
ssQeuemQihj we must give ear to those things which
have been said by God,
Again: Verbal nouns (formed from relative parti-
ciples of (1.) intransitive, and (2.) passive verbs)
whose relative pronouns are not in the nominative case.
I saw their weeping and wept also; lit. seeing that in
which they weptj I also wept,
^^uq(hiT&TQj((^(p§^^fBrr^LDnp^QiFei>^ih, it is four
months to harvest; lit. to that in which the reaping
day comes, four months unU pass,
Qurratr^d^uuniurraj do not fmt, because % reward
VER3AL NOUNS. 117
v^ be great in ieopen; lit. by (reasm of) Ihai in vfaieh
a great reward ti»fi come. to you to hea(Dien,famt tiot,
.!Bfr^(}uff€Up^^(tpGS[Qes(QuiT, lit go before ffta/ in which
I.^mU go.
Ou/fiijeB^fun^(!p€^(B, there is great difference between
bdievers and ta^dievers; lit. b^ween thme to whom
faith iSyOnd those to whom faith is not, there is great
difference.
ih, lit. that wiU be a cause to that in which (or, by
which) OocPs glory dmes, i. e. that i^tS cause Ood'js
glory to be man^est.
ei^d^&snQs'^pf^QeoejGsri^^j^&^ekfQ, I am sad
beeause my ddld has died, lit. by (reason of) that
in which my ^ild died there is sorrow to me.
mmfoO^tjSmi^&Qsoyj^^SfOfiBi^QutT^^, he died be-
cause I was not there; lit by (reason of) that in
which (or, by which) I was not there he died,
eBr, J tM you those things in order that you might be
saeed; lit. / told you those things to Aat in which ye
shaU (or may) be saved.
VERBAL NOUNS
Formed from the relative participles of
aiid.cl^^.
The verb ^(§Bdp^, to be, is ^aboays, and ^^pgi, to
became, is sometimes, osed to affirm one noun of ano«
118 SYNTAX.
ther. They affirm the noun wiUi which they are im-
mediately joined, of another noun, in the same sen-
tence, which is their proper nominative or subject, thus:
^€u^ uiTeSajmjS(^d(n^€br, he is a sinner; ^fsu^eS^stsr
^^6^, he became a fooh utreS and dScfisre&r are
here affirmed of jiyQi6&r. See sec. lvi, lvii.
The verbal nouns of t^tS(i^adp^ always, and the
verbal nouns of ^^ros^ sometimes retain this pre-
dicating power. The following verbals, not being
preceded by a nominative of their own, necessarily
have their rdative pronoun in the nominative case,
and consequently affirm the noun with which they are
joined of thek own relative pronoun, thus :
€Te0€0n6u^fS^^&sfTir€6N!TfT(iSf($aSf0€ufr^€istL^Qjfr, he who
is the cause of aU things (is) Ood,
GiDdjiuiT€creiiefituiT€t5r€ijfr &eu€if^^^f(Sei> <2^rr^{S^&, he
who is the true light appeared in ^is world. See sec.
LVI I. 1. note.
The following verbals, being preceded by a nomi-
native of their own, affirm the noun with which they
are joined of that nominative, and their relative pro*
notm^ according to the rule^ may be in any case re-
quired; (nominative and accusative excepted;) thus:
Sro^&.GSTs^^fSeSMuuiLnfL^&dfD^rT, lit. has that in
which they are of a mind to kill you been announced to
you?
Qu/fQtufT^aefieO€f)(!J^^^^U) ^€u(rGiDiO€SmQJtr^(y>aTe(r
€u^t6(!^4fo^s^€&5rL,n, have any of the great ones he-
Uetedonhml lit. is there that in which any one ammug
the great ones is a believer upon him.
VERBAL NOUNS. 119
QutTdff(ip^€i>tTm&s>Qja^€t(st(B, there are gold and other
thingSy lit. those things, in which gold is the be^inmng,
are. See section xxxv. 5.
The verbal noun derived from the negative root ^eo
may also exert this predicating power, thus :
eSiLQe^t^uQun'Qjrr^, lit. the time in which the wolf
comes, the hireling, who is he who is not the shepherd,
and he who is not the owner of the sheep, wiU leave
the sheep and run away.
These verbal nouns may also be inflected in any case
required, thus:
€Siun^m&s>L^iu€ufr&6tTtruS(i^iB^eiiiTaQ6ns ^sBSftLfrsS^fr, he
healed those who were sick.
^(!^i^^(]S(!${B^eii^6SiUiua€BstSQ6rT^^(0iB^nfrf he opened
the eyes of him who was a bUnd man.
you must render that which shtdl be smtcdtle to God.
pCL^n-Qo5rQutT^(tp^€i)n€(ffssi€ija€uBtT&&€SiL^tiSeO€urTfbduSiT
s^^^rbOiCBLDnl goldsmith! can you buy gold and
such other things (lit. those things in which gold is the
beginning) in the bazar, and make som>e jewels for me
within two weeks?
fiirs&r, ye know that this king was formerly a beggar ;
lit ye know that in which this Icing was formerly a
beggar.
1^ SYNTAX.
Ihaoe h(snr4thai he is mk; lit. / hap<e ht^d (Aof in
which he %8 sick.
Se^QBfL Yerb^nQUBs formed from the rf^alive par-
ticiple of trcmsUive verbs.
The rules in regard to such relfttive piarticiples are
three. The first is as follows: (See section XLvi. II.
2. (1.) "If the relative participle of a transitive ijerb
.bas a noun, which it governs in the accusative, preced-
ing iit, the retoif.^ pnmfiim is in the noiiiii^tiy;e caj^e."
Therefore we have,
1. Verbal nouns (formed from the relative parti-
ciples of transitive verbs) whose relative pronom is in
the nominative, thus :
P(!^^€Sip3^0^djSro€Li&ru!T&£ai£itT^,d^ who does aim
(19) a happy person,
AOTylheif who shailhear the wordof the J^fued Jeaus
AMHse.
4iS&0^i€Si€U€S9€ijn^{jjn^€uit^mOsCQLsQim^niraerr,Jth^
who da- not he^oe (on) Gkrisi wiU pmth,
urTQj^esi^^Gff\u£rDJfi(2aiLQai§^^Qj!TaS0S^u>j sinning is
the cause of destruction ; lit. that which does sin will he
the cause of destruction.
The second rule respecting relative participles of
transitive verbs is thus given in section xlti. IL2. (2.)
"If the relative participle is preceded by a nominative
of its own, the relative pronoun is in the accusative
case." Hence we have,
VERBAL NOUNS. 121
a. Verbal nouns (formed from the relative parti'-
ciples of transitive verbs) whose rdaHDe pronoun is in
the accusative, thus :
i§d(«<ir(^^«u^^DjV€;S@cor«fr/ftuu), thai which ye do (is) a
vain Mng.
iQ^tT^car^Qundi, that which Aou saidst (is) a He.
€S0t€ijfT^a^&^ &[r^pnQafT(SuLjffi ^ffiuirGsrA^ibf thai
which the Lord a^ott ^ve to beHeoers (is) eteFa4d jmf.
Note* The verbal nouns in these last three examples are neuter
verbals. This use of thern is connmon. Persimat verbal nount,
having their reltttive prenoun in the aecuaative, do also occuT)
thus:
u/rtruff^^£fiii-JiSweui^Q/ieio^fin'/gir^ he whom God eent
(is) the Lord Christ.
^miirirs^^ they whom he has given me shall obtain heaven.
This use of them however is unfrequent. Personal verbal
nouns (formed from relative participles of transitive verbs) are gen-
erally preceded by an accusative of their own, and consequently,
in all such cases, their relative pronoun is necessarily in the no-
minative; See second I. above. Instead of using such sentences
as the two last given above, it is always better to say, uir/ruir^c^
tljutLL^Qjn-smQLDiru,£:f9s>;§LjQLjpjt»&QsnGirQjtrff'ei^r.
The third rule about relative participles of transitive
verbs is, that "if the relative participle is preceded by
both a nominative and an accusative of its own, the re-
laHve pronoun may be in any case which the connexion
requires; (the nominative and accusative cases being
excepted,)" See section XLvi. II. 2. (3.) Conse-
quently we have,
d2
123 SYNTAX.
3. Verbal nouns (formed from the relative partici-
ples of transitive verbs) whose reloHve pronoun may
be in any case exc^t the nominative or accusative;
the connexion determining in what case it must be,
thus:
detroar^tiirpauueanun^aSfo^Quifiuun'euibf iiis a great
sin for a chUd to strike its fiither; lit. thaJt in which
n ckUd strikes its father (is) a great sin.
^G5ip0pf^prruS($sd^fD^, our praising God will be
profitable to us; lit. that in which we shall praise God
is that which shall give profit to us.
ufT€8\umiS0sSfO€u^ ^n)q^siaei£n^Q^dj6u<?^uut^, how
can a sinner work miraclesl lit. that in which he who
is a sinner shall do miracles (is) how?
Nele. The verbal nouns in these last three examples are neu-
ter verbals. Personal verbal nouns are never (to our knowledge)
preceded by both a nominative and an accusative of their own.
As has been stated, personal verbals (formed from relative parti-
ciples of transitive verbs) are generally preceded by an accusative,
and infrequently, by a nominative of their own. See second 1
and 2, above.
Inflection op Verbal Nouns.
Verbal nouns, (formed from the relative participles
of transitive verbs) while they exert verbal energy, are
nouns, and may therefore be inflected in any case re-
4)uired, thus :
1« Verbal nouns whose relative pronoun is in the
nominative.
VERBAL NOUNS. 123
cisfQibi we must fulfil the wUl of km who created us.
crcsroor ajgjfutS6orfi;ift-.^^/b,5 flSfffi&r^c^iitSu QunaeOfTinn,
may / return to hm who sent me?
^fij(f$60)L.uj u{T^iTiL€Si^vS^Qjn0SiimjeSf^uu^0^§md!rurrfi
^fTGsreoeOf Hi. I am not worthy to that which shall loose
his shoe latchet.
2. Verhal nouns whose relative pronoun is in the ac-
cusative,
I proclaim those things which / heard and those things
which I saw.
^€udffQ^iliu€Si6U3QsnihiT^^Q^dj06ud!r, Icon do what
he can; lit. I ako shall (or C(m) do those things which
he can do.
£ 0s^iT€isr€^esieusefiGsrS(!^^^GT€(SiA^6Scrr&i& eSiosiso, lit.
the meaning of those things which you said tUd not ap*
pear to me ; i. e. / did not understand, Sfc.
£iBsefTf6{unp€S)^0G^rTt£ffiQsnerT€rT^dffraefT, ye worship
that which ye do not know.
Note* The verbals in these last four examples are neuter
verbals. As has been stated, (See second 2. note) personal verbal
nouns, having their relative pronoun in the accusative, do not
occur very frequently ; when they occur they may be inflected,
thus:
ujrn-ujrar^^fidjtSeareuesiffjgirijiGSsfwirff^gt^A'eitrdld^ ipg must
believe (on) him whom God has sent. It is better to say,
uff(rujr(9^90^i!!3uC3utLL^eu9s>ffjgirui^ &c.
3. Verbal nouns whose relative pronoun may be in
any case (the nominative and accusative cases except*
ed) that the context requires.
124 (SYNTAX.
€U!itDiTiLL.ir^, he vAU not come to my house beasuge he
hates me; by (reason of) that in which he hates me
he vnU not come to my house.
^t€UQ6snusufr&6fTmoibQuf^efiesr€S^AO&CQL^^, I heard
thcU they had cast him oM; lit. / heard that in which
they cast hvn out,
they believed because they saw miracles; lit. by that in
which they saw miracles they believed.
tiajiB^(S6UQ£0€S)UJ(pt^uup^^(oT^^€i£tsr(BrrGfrG^io^tb, how
mamj days will it take thee to finish ihatjobl lit. to that
in which thou shalt finish that work how many days wiU
passl
Qu€^y lit. I shall punish thee on account of that in which
thou didst that fault.
SECTION LI.
(G. § 60, 61.)
1. The imperative mood is used with or without the
pronoun, as: /§u5iEiO(Sa/n-, come thou hither; ^(aOsOurr
ikia&T, go (ye) thither.
2. The optcUive, or poUte imperative mood, is used
thus,
iDQeBrsS^&srmiua^At^StSt^uudeurrentTBj let die wife obey
her husband.
NEGATIVE VERB. 125
^[T^€ysari&€m^Q^ujiua&L^QQjiTU)f let us honor the king.
ii&i&&rajfr^eSfra€rrfTa, may you prosper.
^GuiT^GSitDiuntijaQ&C&, may you hear with patience.
8SCTI0I« UI.
(G. §62.)
The Negative Verb.
1. The first form of the negative verb (See section
XXVIII. 1.) is used to express a general proposition
without reference to any specific time, as :
Seu^^d^urrdsT, this man does not steal.
Here ^0L.frs& embraces all times, and means he did not^
does not, mil not steal, i. e. it is not his habit.
^^iDnna&frQu>rrtLff^^a^Qurrarrnae(rf the mcked do
not go to heaven.
It is also used specifically to express the future time,
as: ^Qj^u€isn:^€iSiaa^6un!Tndfrf he will not come to the
feast.
2. The third form of the negative verb, which is
made by adding Siooeo to the infinitive mood of the
affirmative verb, expresses the past time; thus, ^eu^
prry^esuDiurTauCSu^eSioeijsOj he did not speak htmibhj.
3. The singular neuter verbal noun of the present
tense with Q^ooeo, is also used to express a general
proposition without reference to time, as : ^eue^^d^QS
p^iO€uso, he dees not steal, (lit, that in which he steals is
not] A)IQJ^ being nominative to the verbal, and the
verbal being nominative to ^iooso.) See section
xxviii. 4.
126 SrNTAX.
SECTION LIII.
(G. § 63.)
1. Transitive verbs made pasnve, by the addition of
uQSfD^, usually require the instrumental ablative, as :
Qihpa&fTdftheTGir,^0€OQiuL£jiuuL-t^(l$ad^f!)ffif this let*
ter has been written by me.
Note, Relative participles of uQQfi) #> sometimes follow the
infinitives of transitive verbs, without converting them into pas-
sive verbs, thus: jfil&i^s^^^firi9ttfi9Si^isCjuiLu.^i^ih^ Ut.
the place which suffered that they placed the body, i. e. the
place in which they put the body,
2. uQStjoSi is also sometimes added to the infinitive
of intransitive verbs in the relative participle form,, as :
^Q/69r/5L.<s«(juL.L.fiui^, the rood which he went; lit.
the road which suffered that he walked.
/5/T6!(r@($(S<SB(juL.L.efiin', the village in which I dvoeU; lit.
the village which suffered that I dwelled.
3. The third person singular neuter negative of u(B
d^^ is sometimes used with all persons in the sense of
^stT^, or AiL.rrjSJ, as : /^/srAeYfuijt^^G'^iUUJuuL.p'^, ye
must not do so.
Note. From the relative participle utLL,^ and the words
^tljut^^ gitljut9^^ so, and crCiui^, how, are formed the adjec-
tives ^^ui9~CjulLu.^ ^tljut^utLu.^ and «^Cjui^-4l»ULL
thus :
^djLJi9L.CjuCL-Ui9S/gear^ such a man.
auut^CjuilL^LD^S/f&T^ yjhat kind of a man?
THE VERB a^drojfi, 127
Ind from these are fonned nouns, thus :
^il3ui^t!butl.i—su«f, such a man,
^Cjui^LJULLL^^oTy guch a woman,
^djut9^Cju(^i-.^y iuch a thing,
Pttliut^utLuMirsar^ such per tims,
^t:/LjJfLd/uili-.«»<ai«er, such thinga,
Ac. &c. &c. &c.
SECTION LIV.
(G. § 64.)
Some |irts of the verb ci^dro^, to soy, are used in
a peculiar ^nse.
1. The ^rbal participle ^^g^ is used,
(1.) As in indicative conjunction, thus:
know ^un^tkat God is merciful; lit. saying God is mer"
cifd hum thou,
a£yru5LLt.n^, God has commanded that the people must
obey him.
It can in mdst cages be translated by thai ; but sometimes
it can only berendered literally, viz. saying.
(2.) When the words of another are to be quoted in
his own langiage, thus :
Mits&T^fysiiT^0^(!$iaefiL.0fic^€^qffnnM.S€tTrTsQQj
dsrsP^srr^p^Gs'fTdir^frf the Lord said, ^*you must love
your enemiiSt^^ or, the Lord said that you must lave your
enemies; IH. the Lord said, saying you, S^c.
I2S 8TNTAX.
If there are more quotations than one, each qucta-
tion must receive cresr^ and the conjunction tub, t?as :
€Su9rT[Tthu65sr^0(i$uufTitjrTsQ6U€brg»ib, QurrdiQ^ndeOn-
^(§uu[Tiurr&Q€u&sfg)>u> ui7/TU£r6fer«L-«-.6a«ru5tlt_/r»T God
has commanded "thou shalt not commit aduUeryi* and
**thou shalt not lie,^^
Observe
that since ereSr^ is thus used both as an indicative con-
junction, and a particle of quotation, it mus never be
used as an indicative conjunction in cases vhere, if it
should be understood as a particle of quotatvn, a wrong
idea would be conveyed. For instance, we 3ay in Eng-
lish, ''God has commanded that we must nit lie ;'' but
if you say in Tamil
(hnih Ou(TibQs:iTiO€On'^(i^u(purTU)rTsG€u^^ ujttu ireSra tit-
aEmiStlL-n-n"; although you may have infended to use
€i&srn)j as an indicative conjunction, it wll be under-
stood as ^LfKwHcle of quotation, and the sentence will
mean that Chd commands that neither Hi, nor we, must
speak lies. If you use CTe&rjji here, yoi must quote
the command in the very words in which it was de-
livered, thus:
A&i&en QuirdiQffn6060rT^(f^iSfrs6fTiTaG€ii^g^ u£rn'uir$&r<s
£lL.Q£rru5L.cn'/T, Godhasc.ommanded,"ye^iaUnotUe;^^
or io6t^§naei(r QundjOs^rrioeOfTf^uiTfraefrirsQeuesr^
U7rruircsrailL.Q«iTu5ilL.rr/T, God has comnanded **men
must. not /ie.^'
The inf. OTtfci (CTtf&rwr), although used as the pro-
THE VERB (Sl^dfO^. 129
per mfioitive of et^4^^, is likewise used as a par-
ticki in the same way as er^g^i, thus: &L/ifi^frQ(uc9r#
Q^n^^^, he said that thou earnest.
2. The future relative participle €r6irgpfio is used to
identify persons or things,^ and is affixed to their names.
It may be rendered ^*eaUed,^^ thus :
^6uQ€or^^ihO^€U€^, the god Siven, i. e. ^ god eaXM
Siven,
^(|5#^6B>u©ttJ65rgi/g5©^/r60, the toord '^chwrch.^^
ffrB(S§n€ipGiD^^ih(or€S(ffQ€miJj J the oU of gladness.
The relative participles of the passive form may be
used in the same manner, thus :
^6uQ6i5T&sr€isTuuL.L,G^Qj€srj the God who was caOed Siven.
3. The subjunctive (CTcSr^fyo), or crfiafa?, if thou say, or
askj is often added to interrogating adverbs and pro-
nouns, as: CT6or6or^^^©6065r(fl7^, if you ask, why? ^
Grrasfdn^eOf if you ask, who? eJuui^Gtu^fff/io, if you ask,
how? €T^€srQQjGsr(fri€0, if you ask, what? These com-
pound words may be used,
(1.) at the begmning of sentences, as:
^6u^arr€tj€SeO€Si6ussuutLurTds{, CJ^6sr0f^Q€O^(ir^
Q^iu^fre&r, (or more correctly, Q&aeusoQfffb^f^deo) ,
he was put in prison, because, observing jewels upon a
chad, he killed it in order to seize them^ lit. he was put
in prison. If you ask, why? he, observing, 8fc, Or
(2.) they may be added to verbal nouns, thus:
jijeuGsr arrojeSio &sieua&uuLLL^Q^^€erf^^G€0€i^io ^
130 SYNTAX.
€u^€p(!^&rQstrt6€(^L~^^eOy &.c. his having been put
in priion, if you ask why (it was,) he observing^ fyc.
0:> The sentence then ends as in the former case.
iGffiTiO€OQ€ue6sr(i€uOpdsf€mQ€uetF(i9iOf that which ^U)u
1"*'^ 9oyf if ^ou askest what (it is) ^.c, i. e. thou
shaU say thus, S^c.
jil€u^60jii^uuuuLLLjsunsaTnQ!Tet^eOf these who were
seiU by him, if you ask who (they are), S^c, i. e. those
who were sent by him are these, SfC.
&^thuihpGf^uui!^Gaj€bF(Sf60, it happened thus, ^c.
In each case, the interrogating adverb or pronoun may be
separated from the subjunctive, and be placed before the ver-
bal noun to which it was affixed. The verbal noun then becomes
a verb, thus :
/C)iuc&r«rO^/r^<D(?«;a0r(POu3 or (O)^^
These interrogating phrases should not be used, if the answer,
which it is their office to introduce, be quite short. In such cases
the causal particle ui9^nS^(»to should be used instead, thus:
isdjuiLt^trar^ jig ^at put in prison beeatue (lit. 6y
the step at which) he killed a child,
4. The verbal nouns er^uoj^, and er^u^.
(1.) et^ueudsf is added, as a distinguishing sign,
to proper nouns introduced into Tamil from foreign
tongues, thus : OturreufrQem^ueufisr, Joktu It may also
be added to Tamil proper nouns, in cases of doubt;
thus:
e^n)^€sisGGSt^u€is^, SSthman; ^p^^stx^ literally
means a virtuous person.
THE VERB STGST^fr)^. 131
It may also be added from choice merely, thuiS :
^€u(o6(5f&sruQj^^t£i^(§Si§€ii(i^Q^eijdsr, Siven (is) a god
to the Temulians.
This verbal may be put in any case required.
(2.) cr^u^ is thus employed. When we wish
to use a whole sentence as though it were a single
noun, we may add CT6sru^ to it, and that whole
sentence may thus be made the subject, or object of
a following clause; thus:
LDed^Qaeoeorrd^ihurreSaQerr^u^QiDdj^rr^, that aU men
are sinners is certainly true; lit. that ythic)\ shaU say
"aUmen (are) «w«cr«," (is) truth indeed.
^(l^&aQerr3^Q^djaj6S((^ihqeuniurT&Q€u^u&Si^iBrr^lSiiTiom
efijpae&^Qt^^, I saw in the books "desire to do dm-
rUy;^'* lit. I saw that which shall say "(icwVc," &c.
It must also be used Tyhen we wish to quote a single
word, thus :
Si^Oui^u^$)^^^(!3iDQiDGsr^^^0^wnWi the meaning 0/
Note, For another use of these verbals, see sec. xxxv. 4.
Rem. The several parts of the verb cre^droj^f are
equal to the particle ctcst^ and the several correspond-
ing parts of the verb G^nio^dff)^. crdsrdp^ there-
fore not only means "to say^'*^ but always superadds to
that meaning the force of the particle cre&r^, thus :
^ASuiDtrdjeUii^QQjO^Si^tfif^i he said, "I wiU come quick"
Here the verb both quotes and concludes the sen-
tence ; 6763r(fl;65r being equal to «T65^^©^/r«^r^^65^.
132 SYNTAX,
SECTION LV.
(G. § 65.)
In those compound verbs which are formed by com*
bining noiAis with ue^^Sto^ or Qs^iuSfo^, (see aec.
xxxii, verbs formed from nouns,) the noun is oflen the
object of the verb with which it is combined; wherefore,
these compound verbs, though frequently rendered in
Englbh by single active verbs, often do not govern
other nouns in the accusative, and other nouns affected
by them must be disposed of in some suitable way, thus:
6[T^(B&ihuG6Br€Bti?^^f means, he preached^ lit. he made
a sermon.
But, "he preached Christ, ^^ must be, dfS&O^esiOJ^^fi^
QeuibudsrG5tsissu.(SQjrTLbf means, let us make prayer.
But/7e/ us pray to Ood,^^ must be, uucruffoesrQm^d (or
i^oesr^^) Q^uihu^cssraaL.QeutTih, hehMxRg, Ood,
(or thinking of God,) let us make prayer.
QutTjb&thu€Bsr6st^i^fr, means, he taught.
But, "he taught many people,'^'* must be, s^Wi&^GSf^k^ft^
Thus also, ^GuiraetTQsrTuikiGaiTe&BrL.nfrs&T, means, they
got angry.
But, "they got angry with us,^^ must be, jf6i;fV«6rr6T/b««T
OiUjpOarruiaQarre&sfL^rTna&T.
OBSERVE
1. That even these compound verbs . may govern a
THE VERB c|^a5(5<56^p5^. 132
noun in the accusative, if it be a neuter nouQ^ as : <^/e
^^^Gi3^€iS)\iJud!T^iwswum!6ci^^fr, he preached (on)
ihcU subject.
2. That the verbs O^rri^^a^Ge'dj&p^y ^lurresrihu^
^^^ip^y and a few others, together with all compound
verbs formed by combining nouns with ^<it5^/DiS/, may
govern any noun in the accusative, as :
unnuaQew^Q^rrffi^rTG^Q^djajaaL^QQjmhf let us thank
Gad.
^€ufTS€iens^€miDrrs^i^ffj he heaied them.
3. That transitive verbs formed of Sanscrit nouns by
changing their final jyib into ©cS^nD^ always govern the
accusative, thtis:
O^€uG6ar0^iufre^u(surrLDrrs, lei ti$ meditate (on) God,
SECTION LVI*
1. Difference between ^'^s,Sro^ and cguS^ji^p^*
@(!^£p^ simply affirms the existence of its subject;
thus :
U€as[i£^a4p^y there is mcmey.
sfr^pfr(§sd(ffj[frj Crodis.
But ^uS^&Sfosi is always united to some noun; nui
it affirms that noun of its own subject; thus:
^^^rr€snD(TuS(!5adp^, that is wisdom.
^liiSradfS&O^ (S^€u^a5(§aS0fr, Jesus Qirist is Chd.
jiisu^^(^Ui^fj5(§ad(ii^^, he is a thief.
2* <§^ii5<f^i«^^j/ is thus united to a noun, and afiirms that
noun of its own nominative. But it does Thoi affirm
d3
134 SYNTAX.
that noun to be a ^^ity or attribute of its nominative.
It simply affirms the identity of the two nouns. It
declares that the two nouns are one and the same
person or substance, thus :
^eu ^iDde6>tL{unuS^ad(fl^ GST, does not mesLiif he is glon-
ous, but, he is glory itself,
^suiTii^ULimiSd^adfff/fry does not mean, he is just^ but, he
is justice,
ef>efini^es)iDiuntjS(§adfD^, does not mean, ligfu is goody
but, light is goodness. This mode therefore of affirm-
ing one noun to be an attribute of another noun is
incorrect.
But it is correct to say U£rn-u£r6&r€p€tfuj/ru5(5<5^(fl7n',
God is Light, because we wish to say that He is Light
itself. So also
the Lord Jesus is the way, and the truth, and the life,
3. Mode of affirming qualities or attributes. The
power of ^vS(f^&^fD§i is always the same. The change
must therefore be in the noun which is to be declared
an attribute. If one noun is declared to be the attribute
of another masculine noun, it, viz. the attributive noun,
must receive &.GiT6rr€iJ^j &.€SiUiU€iJGsr, c^ecroyecr, or some
other appropriate personal verbal noun, before it unites
with ^u3(!^&£ro^. If it is affirmed to be the attribute
of Vi feminine noun, it must receive a.6ir6rr€a;6Tr, ^«j>i.ttj
€U€(T, ^^QjetT, &c. If of a neuter noun, S-^srr^,
£-6s>L.uj^, <^eoT^, &c. So also in the plural: thus;
^6uniD£&sitL\JL\efTen'Qj[rnuS(i$a<£ftf^n, he is glorious^ lit. he is
he to whom glory is.
THE VERB ^liSt^adro^. 135
Here ^nS^iQp^ affirms its own nominative, and he to
whom glort/ is (as an attribute) to be the same person.
Sl6uiTi^q0SiUiUQJiiniiS($sd(ffa, he iajtist,
^QjefTu^ST^^(iperT6rr6U6fTrTiiS(f^ihpnGrr, she teas holtf*
6p6iff/56cr63)[r>iq6Tr6rr^fru5(5<5^65rn5^, light is good,
SjeuasT Q^iu^S/fsciiu&GfT i5[T(Siu{Tff€mLDrr€GT&S)6u&6fTnuS(§ih^
ecr, the deeds which he did were useful.
This rule is often violated, but it should be strictly
observed, because it enjoins the most accurate, philoso-
phical, and above all, the most perspicuous mode of
expression.
4. When ^t6(§adfD^ relates to more than one noun,
the verbal part. «^aj is separated from @0^£fD^, and
added to each noun vtrith the conjunction S-ih either
before or after it, thus :
^0q&Ten€iJ[rn^ih@aaa(ipeaett6uanqi£((^ad(n;rr, God is
righteous and merciful.
6. Ellipsis, When the sentence is in the present
tense, and ^^ySd^aSrp^ affirms ordy one noun of its no-
minative, ^u5(i^adro^ must, or may be omitted.
(1.) It must be omitted. When the noun affirmed of
the subject is a demonstrative or interrogative pronoun,
thus:
^^6s>iT€Giiu0$(i^t^€m6u^®€ij^, (is) this the man who
stole the horse?
SQiu,^6ij^, thou (art) he !
^euQsmeu^, who (is) hel
136 SYNTAX.
^^creueuerreiff haw tntfcft (is) this!
^eu^€r&i(»s, vjhere (is) hel
(2.) In all other cases, it may be omitted or retained,
at option; thus:
fl5/T6Srun-ca5, / (am) a tinner; or /B/r6Srun"«Siu/nt5(5iJ(J(r)6Sr.
^^f^trmib, that (is) wisdom; or ^^QirmiLnuSfj^i^p^,
Thus also: ^eijfr®!TSS(ip0SiL,iU6uif, he (is) merciful; or
^Qj&s[^(hGprr&^(ipefT€tTGiJG5r, he (is) joyftd; or d^ffi(J^n"€i;t
<gyQL/its6Jru(f*^^mfr60T6]L//r«CTr, /Acy (are) holy; or u^mp
d5£i)fr6orfiL/itafiTrfru5(5«J(57/t«6Tr.
^SiiSaei^&t^tunuj^i&refr^y that (is) very reasonable; or
Aif^f¥tru){r€(sr^j that (is) waf ; or ff £rmn"«5T^iTu5(5«^e!SrrD^.
But if the sentence is in the past or ^/ttfure tense, the
verb must be retained in order to express that tense,
thus :
^Qj^6SujrT^iH0Sii^\u€u^uS(!$iBprT^, he was sick.
Likewise, if more than one noun is affirmed of tlie
subject, the verb must be retained to unite the nouns,
thus:
^Qjfrfnih(tp€SiL^iu^€isrL,€U(r^tDnf]SiTiLffa(f^n'i6(§sd(n^^ he is
our Lord and our Samovr,
Note 1. ^^P^ 9 to become^ ha» two uses. It mayaffiira a
noun of its own subject; thus, ^oL'^Quir^^ir^tu^tg^di^ he
became a bad man. Or it may have simply a nominative ; thus :
JV45 e-«w(S)^^(5Lc» you can do that. Its verbals ^^^^^
^«r^y Sic. also have these two uses; thus: (1.) Tliey may
affirm the noun with which they are joined of their own relative
THE YSAB 4l,£pffi. 137
pronoun; thus: OuifuaJtt'^fr^mRi^sorQjifaLtOsfJSKgtdQ^fftk/l
©/r, he who is the true light appeared in the Winld. 1\ is
here equal to .g(«LS(5«fi^a;/f, and affirms that its own relative
pronoun and light are the same pctson. (2.) Nouna may be
prefixed to these verbals simply as their nominatives; then,
according to rule, their relative pronoun may be in any case,
(except the nominative and accusative;) thus: ^sb&rujfisrfifi
ir/r«»fiu(^uJ/(5i^(7p6j, lit, ^g is he to whom holiness is. u
Hs^^^ih is here nominative to ^<wa/«w-. it will be seen that
it is in this latter use, that the verbals ^eareu^u ^cw^, &c. are
added to nouns, in order to fit them to be used as attributives, as
described in subdivision third above. See also sec. lvii. 1 . note.
Note 2. Excepting this ellipsis of ^•Sqs^^P^j there is
none other in Tamil. Whenever precision, and perspicuity are
at stake, repetition is unavoidable. This will appear particularly
from the passage Matt. v. 34, 35, which has in Greek and
in European languages repeated ellipses ; but a similar construction
cannot be imitated in Tamil, without greatly obscuring the sense.
The passage ought to be rendered thus :
(gJp(s€OiLQLjiliu^ffir^^«nu.iuuLLu.aa'uifrt»ui^tu(r^^^
(g^(0^LSmGt£fi*;i0»jthumfr9ur€i)irsir^f &c.
SECTION LVII.
(G. § 66.)
4
1. Like the verb ^uSd^sdro^, the verb ^dro^ may
be united to a noun, and affirm that noun o£ its own
138 SYNTAX.
nominative. In regard to. their meaning, however, these
.verbs must be carefully distinguished. The former means
"/o 6c," while the latter means, "/o hecomCi'*'* thus :
iBrT€^&'eiisduj(jpe(T€Tr€ij^^QfD^, I become well ; I am get-
ting weU.
Observe also another difference; ^\jS(!^&'ifD^ is in-
variably united with a noun which it affirms of its
own nominative, while c^^fD^ may be thus united,
or it may be used merely with a nominative case, thus :
LDesiffiuS^QeOuiiSiT.^j^U), herbage grows by means of rain*
See sec. Lvi. 6. (2.) note 1.
When <^'^ps^i relates to more than one noun, £.u> is
added to each noun, thus :
Si^f^rT6^3>enf^n6f^&er^(bi^$inn^ser^wn^h&en, the tm-
wise became wise and righteous. Compare section
LVI. 4.
Note, 4Sfi^^ ^^ however sometimes used in the sense of
^to hts^ instead of ^^/o hecomey"* especially in its relative par-
ticiples, and verbal nouns, thus :
^onjora^irirQuj^if^^ifj the Lord who is a gracious being;
not, the* Lord vrho' fias become a gracious being, ^fi<LJ ig
here equal to ^a^QffiSifl)^ and is much more elegant.
2. ^tb (the third pers. neut. fut. or^Sro^) is some-
times used as the affirming particle, yes; but the usual
mode of giving an affirmative answer is by repeating
the verb used in the question, thus : ^^uutif.^Qs'iLprr
tun, hast thou done sol the answer is Q^iuQ^^, I have
done, *
3. cf^«/T^ (the third pers. sing. ncut. negative of
THE VERB ^£ro^» 139
^Sp^) is often added to verbal nouns, signifying it
must not y^it ought not, as :
^Qjihurfesfsunh^esi^aoenu Gu^6i)nsn^, thou must not
talk had words ; lit. your speaking bad words will not
become f (or wW, not take place, i. e. ought not to take
place,) Quffio is nominative to <:^<sfr^.
4. <^6w^, (the future verbal noun of ^dro^) and its
plural ^euffsr, may be added to nouns in the nomi-
native, as particles of introduction or specification,
equivalent to the English Uhus,^ 'viz,^ *as follows,^
^QjnQs^n&srscr^rreu^f he 9<iid thus.
^€ij^Qarr€^(B€iJiB^eija0^ssea[TQjGSTf the articles which
he brought are as follows.
Observe that such sentences ought to close with ^e&r
uQ^, or €r€biu€6)Qj&Q€rr, the finite verb ^ib being un-
derstood after them, thus :
^€UfrQffnm€(5T^rr€u^, iBn^s-ikaQ£rTQ{u^defr€usns€rTrrs
^n)^9>Gs>nenQeuQm^uQ^ ((L/rru)) he said thus, I
tmU receive you as my children; lit. tfiat which shall
be, that which he has said is that which shall say, "I
will receive you as my children,^'*
Si6u^Garr€SisfQQjih^€ua0^a&€rT{T€iJ€cr, @<sihi\, Q^ihi^, id
ffib, i^eoQeO^uesiOjaQerr {ojirih,) the things which he
brought were as follows, iron, copper, wood, and stone.
Note, Sentences such as the last, where several substances
are specified, may close with §^^»^sO€ir • the rel. part, ^^ti^
being understood before, and ^'^ after it, thus: i^fft^j '^9
gi^nwjsQeff ; which stands for uiffQpm ^^^ulcitQiu g^Gam^
140 SVNTAX.
d. ^€u^ is also used as the disjunctive particles
**eUherj^^ '^OTy^^ and may be added to two or more
nounS; or verbal participles, thus :
UQetn'iDn'iiin6iJSi(^§€stQ£srmauineij^jil&uuL^(pei}sSN(Bib, ei-
ther a palmira, or a cocoanut tree must be got.
iSesii^t Ktje either (by) studying science or (by) Miig
any other business.
6. The verbal nouns t^e^euesr, c^€sr^ and ^eii^,
(1.) <^6OTfiU6&r is frequently added to the nominative
«ase of common nouns, (if they are persowd nouiis)
in order clearly to point out the nominative, or give
it special prominence. It is also often equivalent to
the definite article "<^c," thus :
@ffrr^rTQjiT6m€urfaiLu€iSfTa€isrraGaaQ0pncf, the king has
given orders,
^€er€uexsc is also added to proper nouns in the same
way with ertsrusu^. (See section Lir. 4. (1.)
(2.) t^etsr^ and <^su^ may be added to the nomi-
native case (if the noun be neuter) in a sentence,
when there is any doubt which is the nominative.
Again, it may be so affixed when we wish to give
special emphasis or prominence to the nominative. It
is also often added merely as an elegant expletive^
as in the following examples:
wtrtDmLrresr^ST&sieuii^enenuL^fEiSQsnaQarrQadmfD^i the
mango tree yields delicious fruit,
CutTdJiurT€<5T^^(§aj(§aauut^^f,aa^, falsehood is odious.
But «^6orja and r^eu^ cannot like si^u^ be added
DEFECTIVE VERBS. 141
to sent^iceSi or used for quoting. (See section Liv.
4, (2.)
Note. Observe that ^«r^ and ^^jP have no translatable
meaning in these cases, but that ^ ^^ and ^a>«^» when used
as described in subdivision fourth above, have the meaning there
attributed to them.
(3.) ^meu^ and ^esf^ may be added to nouns
of qaal^ to fit them to stand as proper predicates
in a sentence, thus:
jyQ;6&ru/f«^^u>/rCTTa;6&r, He is hdy; lit. ke (is) he to
whom holiness is.
jii^u^8r^piDrT€isr^, that is holy.
This use has been explained in section LVi. 3.
and 5. (2).
SECTION LYIII.
(G. § 70.)
The several parts of the defective verb ep&^tb are
mostly used with the accusative or 2d case, as:
@(kpiDQso^&piD€iso€(5ituQ{uns^ih, this mowUaxn is equal
to that.
@fE^U)0'<E/6EQfivr Cfiebr^&QatT^^ epiueuuueser^Hf make
these trees to be equal one unth another.
But the relative participle cp^^, and the verbal noun
cpuLj, require the dative, as :
^Qj(§eiSit^ajiD£€cnDsQsrT0^ui£ei5)iDuSeOQeo, there is no
glory like his.
uufTurr^sQarrudeOQjso, equality to God is not ; i. e. none
is equal to God.
142 SYNTAX.
The negative form may be used with the dative, or
accusative case ; thus ;
this stone does not agree with those stones; it is dif-
ferent; or S^S>Q£frQujfTGUQJ{TLDCOf &/C.
Note 1. Sometimes it is used without any case; as, fi^^^
^j^^ih ^s^LLy this and that agree.
Note 2. ^fj&j^Osirar^Q/Djp, means, to allow, to aeknow'
ledge, and governs the accusative, thus : ftumi^Oiutrfi^&Qstr
orarQmiwrQilif thou must acknowledge that.
SECTION LIX.
(G. § 71, 72.)
1. The defective verb Qeue^Qih implies ohUgation,
needj necessity, and is used with the infinitive of another
verb, or with the dative case, thus :
6enQ£fTa&riB^(ir;djuui^s&Q6U€Ssr($ih, children must learn
well,
er^isra^ ojuQeuessn^iuuGSisfih (ipuu^eumrs^, the money
which ought to come to me (is) thirty pagodas.
SLiD^S(i^&5)uQiU€isja^Q€u€Ssr(Bihj thy favour is needful to
me.
Note 1. The negative Q»'<s&rL^inl is used only with the second
person, thus : fii*iT^jDts;sk^pGme«i L—irtl^ you must not back-
bite; with the thinl person, ^-t—'Tj^ must be used; See sec-
tion, LXIII. 1. (2.)
Note 2. The transitive verb Geu(sSfr(S8p^ must be distinguish-
ed from this defective verb ; both verbs occur in the following
sentence ;
DEFECTIVE VERBS. 143
«
a^iuGQje&r(Bil^ those who desire to obtain heaven must obey
God.
2. The defective verb wniLQi^^ is used with the in-
finitive of another verb, and means, primarily, wiU not,
thus: ^QjdsrO&rrQssiLmLi^ne^, he will not give. It al-
so mean^ cannot, thus: i^ihL.a&iDnCL^rTdj, thou art not
able to walk.
SECTION LX.
(G. § 73.)
1. The defective negative verbs ^eocieo, and ^ioei),
differ from each other, in that @606i£0 denies the exist-
ence, and ^ioeO the quality of a thing.
Thus to the question, ^Ci^Q60iDnibui^(ipebisL,rT, are
there mangoes in the house? the negative answer is,
@iOQ£0, there are none. But to the question, @^iDiTih
ut^inn- (is) this a mangoel the negative answer must
be, ©^/Dn-ibu/ptD^eo, ^s^eunesn^uui^iti, this (is) not a
mangoe, hut a plantain.
Farther, ^ioaso is added to the nominative case and
always concludes the sentence; but ^soeo may be
>added to any case, and must always be followed by
a clause to the contrary, either expressed or under-
stood, thus:
caused not joy, but sorrow,
2. The verbal participles @ii>€OniD€0 and ©eSr^ are
often used as prepositions, meaning without, as :
144 8TNTAX.
GurrO^th, (being) withoui hu favor, we perished,
#
J^ote. If the sense is future, it must be, ^jBP'^^^*"5«)«)/rft5
iLu-trfiQ^ CQiljQuirQmjiTLh. Here also 9A>n>/r is the verbul
participle; See eection xxvxii. 7. (2.) note.
3. The verbal participles ^ioeorru^eo and ^^trfi are
used as Exceptive, and Conjunctive particles.
(1.) As Exceptives. jtieoeoniDso or ^ecrpS may be
added, as exceptive particles, to the first clause of any
sentence that ends with a negative finite verb. Between
them and the word with which they immediately unite,
the expletive ^ must be inserted. Their signification
may be thus determined ;
First. When added to a clause, which ends with a
verbf they are equivalent to only; thus:
ffiebtu^^ihueSs^OiDiueoeOiTtDeo @^uf^ ^thueSssuyntL
L.rr^, lit. affliction only tmll hcEppen, pleasure wiU not
happen.
crriT, he loiU only honor us, he inll not despise.
Second. When added to a clause, which ends with
any other part of speech than a verb, they also mean
only; but, in addition, they reverse the value of Uie
finite verb in favor of the clause to which tFiey are
attached; therefore, since the finite verb is negative,
they impart its affirmative value to their clause ; thus :
ni^6i5iwei^{uGiU\umfS0f€SiU30SiiU€6ft^wuu>nil.t^nrr, (he de-
sires) good ofdy, he does not desire evil
DEFECTIVE VERBS. 145
ih uniSfUs^nsSseanaiDniLOt^iTih, [we shall become
happy] by his grace only,. we shall not become happy
by any other thing.
(2.) As Conjunctions, ^eoeontoio or ^^iB may
be united, as conjimctive particles, to the first of two
nouns, the second noun having £.ir). They are thus
used in sentences that end with an affirmative verb.
They then signify not only; thus:
utp&aoemuioeomD^SGSiaaQerTyLiQ^fTuiSiLurrdsr, he ate
not onlyjrmts, but also greens.
Note, If the sentence must end with a negative verb, ft-^
only should be added to each noun ; thus :
uifi&sll9ttL^m SoDffslsinLj^ ^/rd}LS}<.aS<&%u, he ate neither
fruiti nor greens.
^^cDiTLOA) or ctycv/A may, in such sentences, be added to the
first noun after it has received ^^ or it may be inserted between
that noun and the fi-^o affixed ; thus :
Uifi&ti^iLfUi€^eo(njifi (or uLpiistsroi)ei9(rui^m) Smjrs^tr
u^^^irCjiSu-eS^^f he ate neither fruits nor greens ; but it
is best always to omit the •Hf«)«>Tai«) in such sentences.
If the first noun be a verbal noun, it also must take
fiLib before it receives ^ioeotrtDeo or j>i^fS, thus:
0f^n&r, she not only spake kindly, but she also gave
alms.
Moreover, when the first noun is a verbal noun the
sentence may end with a negative verb; but the verbal
noun must then also be in the negative; thus:
146 «rNTAX.
GaaQs&eBio^ieo, she not only did lua 9peak kindbf, but
she abb did not give alms.
Yet, even when the sentence ends with a negative
verb, the verbal noun may be in the affirmative, if it is
so qualified that it is made to convey a sense similar to
that conveyed by the negative verbal; thus :
aeSeOQSOj she not only spake harMy, hut she also gaioe
no alms. In analyzing such sentences as these, the
verbal noun must be regarded as nominative to the
verbal participle ^eoedirmeo or ^^fB.
4. ^eoeorriDeo and ,siidsriB, with &U) affixed, or with
S\0^^i @^^^ prefixed, are used as conjunctions at
the beginning of a sentence ; thus :
«sy^60/ru>g?t£), or ^^0\i^ih, ^
«SV^6i/{fiei>c0rrfiD6D, or ^^ojUifkfi, > moreover.
@^eiitDe060criDeOj or ^^ofUi^iS, }
5. The verbal noun jiieoeo^, tiiough sometimes used
like ^ioeoiTWGO or ^^(S, is most frequently used as the
disjunctive or exceptive particle "or.^^ It may be put
between any parts of speech, except the five indefinite
moods, as:
^sioeSesiiuuut^^iCGO^ iDn)O^(§QprrifQS0ffG^ij, eiAer
learn science, or do some other lm$iness. (Compare
Section Lvii. 5.)
Here the sense is exceptive ; you are directed to do
one of two things; but when the sense is not ezcq^e,
we must use sub, as :
(iiuuut^uuiLuGuiriO€On'mi§a€ierri'Q^n&)€i>Q^u> &€UBBr&&
DEFECTIVE VERBS. 147
e^ik^L^nsSi thou must not speak nor think sud^ evil
things,
6. The verbal noun ^mesuL or ©soeon-eoiD, is often
used to form negative nouns, as :
@u&&iL^eGiU>j unmercifuiness.
s'rT^Sff6is>pt]S6060neiSiLD, laziness*
SECTION LXI.
(G. § 74.)
The defective verb &.erT, signifying existence, is used
in the following manner.
1. The simple root &.&r, (with or without c affixed
to it,) is used with the dative case, as a particle denot-
ing into, within, among; thus :
e£tL(t&^^Q&rQun(S^ib, we went into the house.
gliih, evil desires arise unthin the het^ of men,
^€6)€u&^&^9[T@^iS[rpiTesrtDrre5Tjfi, among them this (is)
the chief,
2, The relative participle &,eiTe(r may be preceded
by the 4th, or 7th case, thus :
^tLt^^err€muiTesi€u^iBQ3iiLQuGurTi£€(5!, all things which
were in the house perished.
When ^&rea is added to a noun in the nominative, it
makes an adjective of the noun, thus :
^(2^6S>u{q^6rrui7/rui76&r, the graci^ms Ghd,
Note. Observe that fi-cSrw ig strictly a relative participle in
both the above mentioned instances. In the first example, ^^^
148 SYNTAX.
relative pronoun is in the nominative. Ih the second example,
the preceding noun is nominative to B.o'^cVy and its relative pro-
noun is in the 4th or 7th case, thus: Q(S^uin&reiruffiruiTaij
the God to whom [or, in whom] grace is.
3. £.0SorQ> means there is, thus :
6T6sr6sFL.^^pu^^uu€Ccr(fpdsr@, I have tenfanams.
uLjL.€6i5f0^(SeOgng)iOU(!^€Ss[(Bj there are an hundred per--
sons in the toum.
As a particle denoting existence it is often prefixed
to the verbs <^£ro^, ^vS^^^iD^, <^^^f0^j and u€&sr
^ii£fD^. The last two may govern nouns in the accu-
sative, thus:
Ae»<SE((p€8orL-rru5/r)^, lit. a tumuU became existent; L e. a
tunadt arose,,
^€0&(ip€i(srutT(jS(§ih^f lit. a tumub was existent; i. e.
there too* a tianuU.
afr0^frufO€Si€usQentL^(tpeisru.ns£^)fr, God created also
the fowls; lit. he made existent.
^^mmss$esif,\^€bx(Bu€&S€Gi^^^t he formed a widced
reUgion; lit. he made existent.
These verbs are in constant use.
SECTION LXII.
(G. § 75 to § 78.)
1. The defective verb Gurr^ih requires the dative
case, either expressed or understood, as :
^^esreu^^mbciGSTs^uGurr^ibf food and raiment are
sufficient for me,
Sd^uffieunna^Qun^n^f twenty pagodas are not enough.
DEFECTIVE VERBS. 149
* 2. The defective verb at^Geu^ always requires the
infinitive of another verb, and thus forms the optative
mood, thus :
StBGsrfnfsuueof^eSesiL^Qs^djtuMLjsundj, mayst thou per-
form (thy) service welL
€^€^\L\€bsiL^n&iaL^ekJSi, let there he light.
Note. Sometimes ^' is added to JBt^Qoj^ ^ but it makes
no change in its meaning.
3. The defective verb ^^ih is used
(1.) With the dative case, thus :
@[riE!^f^eo&.ibser^s^0^^ih, or ^^^(LjOTfiirr^, or p&a^,
it behoves you to be mercifuL
(2.) With the infinitive mood, as:
qd^i^m^^tDeystjreSesnuiui^a&^parT^, it is not fit that
a man beat his wife.
The inf. mffi^^s ig here equal to the verbal noun ^^fA^
or JUt^QjDjp,
fS Qff'h\u^§an§€Si€iJSQBtTiF Os^dsprriu, thou didst those
things which thou oughtest not to do; or those things
which are unfit that you do; i. e. which are improper
for you to do.
(3.) Without the dative case or infinitive mood, thus:
^psiT^eSpiDnauGuff(S6U€B6tt~.{Tihf thou must not speak in
a manner which is unbecoming.
SECTION LXIII.
(G. § 78. § 79.)
1. Some parts of the verb end^tpsit to join, to agree,
are peculiarly used.
160 SYNTAX.
(1.) SitQui, the third person neuter of the future
affirmative, Aiif^or or Sni^aj, the past rehitive participle,
and Snun^j the third persop singular neuter in the
negative, are used to express abittty, and kiabiUiy*
They require the instrumental ablative in the ageiU, thus :
@^eT^^ff)Sn(Bu>f I am able to do this; or, Ms lOtS be
possible by me,
Gidft^pskHf^anDtLQ^Q^iuQQjdsr, I shall do as much as
I can; lit. / shall do even (to) the timU which is
possible by me.
eT^6ifih^€ii^jpekUfrffi, he is not able to do any thing.
While these peculiar forms, as long as they are thus
used, do constantly require the agent to be in the 3d
case, their subject, if it expresses an action, must be in
the infinitive mood, or the dative case of the verbal
noun, thus :
^lB^^SreS)lD€SHUaQafT€SGt(BOurT& (or, ^iB^S^Sr€t5)lD0SHU&
QaneSBsQQunSp[>p^^) £.6sr@;f)aiL.rrji;, thou art not
able to carry thai burden.
Note. ^Jk0^9tnii9SMJsQsiir9Sa<B<SutrQp^ (or, Osffma
QutT^fii>) ^w(^/!jSL.i^ir^i^ is the most otrictly correct fonn,
but it is not as common as the other t^to forms.
(2.) aki^rrffi is also used in entirely another sense,
viz.; it is added to the infinitive of other verbs in the
sense of ought not, cannot, must not. It implies tmpro^
priety and command, thus :
tBtTU>^QjfraQsrT^^^uuuQ0^isikt^rr^, we must not afflict
them.
^&SimiS^^S)L^iu9(tpa^f6)idaO€u4^aa^SiiLjr^, thou must
not enter into the presence of the gentleman.
DEFECTIVE VERBS. 151
SmQih cannot however be used as the opposite of
anUrr^' in this sense. We cannot say,
^6s>fji£^GS>u,tuff(tpa0^io^6a(hu^asa3ik(Bibf in order
to express thou mayst enter tnto the presence of the
geiUkman.
We mnst use instead the verbal noun in ^io with
c^ib; thus :
OBSERVE
That foreigners are apt to join OtQih and eki^n^ to
the infinitives of other verbs, in order to express abilittf
and inability, thus : iBn^^GSip^Qs^iuiu&enQib, I can do
that; and /Bfr6or^6Q)^^0^(IjiuiAii.rr^, I cannot do that;
but this is not correct. To express the former sentence,
use BkQih with the instrumental ablative, (as shown
above) or the simple future, thus :
•«^*®^*?J'°5 I I can do that.
To express the latter sentence, use skurrffi with the
instrumental ablative, or such phrases as farradtuSeooeo,
€ui0€0e6>iDf6i0QS0f thus:
^^s:€xsr.^ff)3ki^rr^ or
^mretgituSeOQSo, or
I am not able to do that.
^eGifS^Q^djiuiDntLQt^dsf may also be used, since
iLrrCQuiB^ though it chiefly means toUl not, also means
cannot.
152
SYNTAX.
>
<2i
s
o
CQ
4>
o
o
o
0^
o
«5
CO
r3
09
4;
is
CO
ed
G
ca
a,
o
• pat
e^
o
«»
o
H
03
O ^ "^
5>^
•^ -9^ r^
.3 .=J '^ '3 S '3 .3 ^ '(o 3
1 ^
% <
bo
!z;
o
•»
O
<
o
CO
o
bo
9
•3
O o
•Si
3
fc
•»«
9
b
•3 o
t:
9
•I
3
•3
C9
00
-§
$>
>*i
§•
^
•*«•
1
•^
S
^
S
&
Q
«
^
« i<?
•^
»0
t=
c^.
i€V.
c»
t:
«
J
^
^ 3
fc.
•f8
•
s^
3
^
R
•3
•
PRONOUNS. 153
3. or the verb Qun^dro^j to be tike, the infinitive
Qufred, and the relative participles of the past and
future tenses Qutrdsrfp, and Gurr^ih, are used with
the accusative case, and sometimes also with the nomi-
native, as :
jya/6)uS8ruCpU/T60#Q<F{U, do like him,
iDiTihQun'eoii^((r^dsr, he stood like a tree,
ffn^feusafu(Su!T^ro@rTfTQj€sadsfQs'fpfTdsr, Ravaneny who
was like SattUn, is dead.
Note. (»u/rf& is sometimes used for Quired.
SECTION LXIV.
(G. § 80.)
The Tamil pronouns are used as in European lan-
guages. They are frequently omitted, inasmuch as the
finite verb often sufficiently points out the person, thus :
Quui^^Q^n^Qesi^, I said so*
The particular uses of each pronoun are as follows :
1. fls/rm, tc6, includes both the speaker and those who
are spoken to; thus, if I say to you iBrru>urr«aS(S6rrrru5(;^<s^
Gftijih, I assert that, we (i. e. both you and I) are sinners.
Great men, however, when speaking of themselves,
sometimes use /Errtl) instead of thtr^.
iBfTSiaG^, we, the other plural form of atrdsi, excludes
those who are spoken to, and is therefore properly op-
posed to /f/foadr; thus: miBS&TQunGeunih, ^fy&efT@m
GstiS(Sui3naerTfr&, we will go, (but) do you stay here.
154 SYNTAX*
miTib&&r is also used by single persons, when speaking
of themselves, instead of mdsr, and is more definite
than iBtrib,
«
2. ff , thou, is always used by superiors to inferiors ;
ff/T and 1^ IB sen are used by inferiors to superiors. Sia
s^ is more honorable than /S/^; /§/t is also used by equals.
To say (f to a superior, or an equal, would be an affront.
3. ^€u^, ^€u^, ) are always used of persons or
^^, ^Qjfr&G(T, > things, when ^ant or ofr-
and ^€s>QJse(T, ) sent,
®€u^, ^Qjerr, ^ are always used of persons or
®^i @a//T<sBOT, > things, when near or present.
and @G5i6uaeiT, ) (See sec. xvii. 1.)
All these pronouns therefore are invariably demonstra-
tive pronouns; thus:
^tDsQesrdsrgii^&uu^G^tr^^^, tchen father and
son evdered the home, the father said, **this (is) my son."
If ^6i«&- be here substituted for g)d/«sr, ^be father must be
iinderstood as referring, not to the son who entered the house
with him, but to another son not there present.
JN'ote 1 . .^fi"^, Si^f^ are used as plurals in high Tamil, but
in common life only as honorifics of a single person, thus: ^fur
sr^QLti(o€i>jg98>ujiLiGSiL^tu^jnraSQ$^^trirj he was gracious to
me. The ordinary plural ^euils&r is also used as a still higher
honorific than ^^tr; it is often added to the noun denoting the
rank of the person alluded to, thus : ^casrujoj/rsar^iljut^J^
^tLL^fartSiLt^V^s^j the gentleman so ordered; if the speaker
literally means more than one, ^^STuiirirsvr should be sub-
stituted.
PRONOUNS. 155
^ote 2. When •J/^'wr^ or ^ojo-^ or -^^> is put twice, as, iJf
warwea* ^tt/iTfiu/r, See, it means every one^ each one^ respective-
ly. Usually the last one only is inflected, thus : ujfiruff^Ji^u
«r«fjprf(i^^#i«#«r«Du«i}&gr ^aSCjuirir^ God will reeom"
petue^ as is due unto every man. Both however may be inflected.
4. The reciprocal or reflective pronouns ^/r6&r, ^(r£i-
s^, ^nibi refer to nouns of the third person; they are
«sed instead of jya/ear, ^euira&ir, jyaz/V, when the tuh
fiUfuawe of the sentence, and not another noun, is to be
referred to ; thus :
^^fTifaj€br§dsf€U€i&^u0€Sipyt^Q0^^ Qaa€krL.!Tdff, means
the priest put on his (own) garment. If you should say
jilQjglt€Sit^ui€udofa0€Sipj it would mean the garment
of another person.
&iLL^QBtruStLi^(T&, God has commanded thai men must
low hm.
iL/^/re^, he kitted hts wife and children.
Note 1. Neuter nouns usually do not require the reciprocal
pronoun, thus: LOffias^OsirQiQ/Djp^ the tree gives (it8)/ftct^
Yet plural neuter nouns, when their respective natures (See
3. note 2. above) are referred to, receive it, thus:
/WW, trees give fruit according to their (respective) kinds.
Note 2. ^frar ig sometimes used as an honorific by a superior,
when, in addressing an inferior, he wishes to avoid the blunt ad-
dress of /• ^f^Lh 18 sometimes used instead of f^ by equals ;
and ^iriisSr instead of fms^ by inferiors to superiors. The
156 SYNTAX.
indeclinable particles ^^rn- and 0i^^ must 'not be confoUnded
with this proDOim,
5. The indefinite demonstrative pronoun Qd^rm. In
Tamil, there are no rekuive pronouns answering to the
relative pronouns in English. The Tamulian, in many
instances, expresses that which is equivalent to our relor
tive pronoun by using a relatioe participle or a verbal
noun; in other cases, he does it by means of ^dsrem and
the particle er^^ ; thus :
jil&^uist^^dsf®dsr^Q6srdsrn)iSTG5fs^0Gp^ajrr^, I do not
know who that fnJn is; lit. that that man (is) such an
onCf is not knoum to me,
^^SdsfesfGp^ji^sne&GfiSuQudir, I wiU show what thai
is.
^freSa^^Qeo Qf^esreSdsremesiQjaenfBUfh^mOsudsrgfiQ^fr
60^, tell what things happened in ancient times; or yi^
€SaffGeOiBL^^€s>€ua€ustTi:Qffrreo^, tell those Mugs
which happened in ancient times.
In the same way Suun^uuCu is used, as : ahfpiK
^^fieSaaQeu^^Qibf inform us what instructions the Lord
gave.
In order to express the English relative pronouns,
some, instead of using @6sr6or with crdscg^ as described
above, use the interrogative pronouns with et^Sfi ; thus :
c76^6or fBUfkpQ^dff^Q^fTGO^, &c. But this use of
them is not proper, for, although in English the pro-
nouns "who," and "what," are relative, or interrogatioe,
according to their position, the interrogative prououns
INTERROGATIVES. 157
in Tamil are interrogatives only. They should therefore
be used only in interrogative sentences. In those sen-
tences, however, which are not interrogative sentences
when considered as a whole, but which, inasmuch as
they close with a verb meaning ask, inquire, S^c, do
contain a question which is to be asked, Sfc, the in-
terrogative pronouns may be used in that question;
thus:
c$y/E^u)6off /tcgOiresr^CffAerr, ask who those men are,
^^n^a^fCSeo eTdsr€Gr{Bu.iBp0^^g)i eS^rrfr^^aQanea, in"
quire what happened in ancient times.
SECTION LXV.
(G. § 81.)
1. The interrogatives creud^, tuneufisr, &c., erUip, cr,
&c., are used like interrogatives in the English lan-
guage, thus : ' '^'^
cfQjQ^^L^Qu^^^, with wham did she speakl
crppAnsQJOiptTdsr, what did he come fori
€TtB^a^^€O!TtiS^QtDQ€0^€Sfr, what horse will you mount 1
eTeu6St^^f€d(§ik^Qifl^fffldj,Jrom what place do you come?
2. In point of position, crciyeftr, efeu&r, cr^, &c., when
in the nominative case only, often stand at the end of
the sentence; the predicating verb ^uS^adrp^ having
been omitted; [see sec. lvi. 5. (I*)] thus:
^Qj^ereu&sr, (•r (u/royc&r,) who (is) he?
@iB^uu€SS^6SipaGsrr€^(Bekj&^€ufrsQ€a€uira&T, who
brought this money? lit. they who brought this money
(are) who?
e2
168 -SrNTAX.
Sometimes, however, the datives of the neuter inter-
Togatives ot^ and (Si^sst are placed at the end of a
sentence, thus :
^Q^pn)f§, for what (is) that!
@©^6cr6?jr^^<5^, for what (is) this ?
3. The interrogative particle g^ connects the inter-'
rogative pronoun (srfinjesr, or G€u&t, or er^, &.C., with a
following demonstrative pronoun, and thus forms the
compound pronoun whosoever j whatsoever, thus:
&€rr€iiGs'djdro6ijQ€m6uQ^^Qj^^d!nDrTfr&&€Sff, whosoever
steals (is) wicked.
Qih, with whatsoever measure thou m^asurest, it shall
be measured also unto thee.
Interrogative adverbs are connected with demonstra-
tive adverbs, in the same way, and for the same purpose,
thus :
wherever I go, ^ere thou also must come.
Note, The ^ is frequently separated from the interrogative,
«nd the construction of the sentence changed in the foUowing
manner :
QtdiuarsQ(»)QfUfr^fifva)QtQ(Limi»(^LLQr^sCju§tlf See, ; but
this is not elegant.
4. The particle ^u) forms the interroglitive pronoutis
CT6L;6sr, lurroj^, dz^c, into the distributive pronouns every
one, all, thus :
cT6Lf@Md)QJi760frtb, every one may come.
INTERR06ATIVES. 159
CT6»fiua;n-<56frttj/ra7(fl5«^ii)iS#«j)#©«/r®««6>)/ru), (we) may
give alms to every poor man. (See sec. xviii. 3.)
5. The addition of c^«^g2fto or ^^&th, (fourth in-
definite moods of ^Sp^,) changes interrogative pro-
nouns into the indefinite pronouns at hast one, any one,
whoever, thus: eTQj^d^ibGurr&QeueSGrQib, one or the
other must go. (See sec. xviii. 6.)
Note 1. The difference between cl^ and ^Qst'^ is that cllo
fixes the meaning upon a//, whereas ^fi^ii is indefinite^ thus:
groj^ilQunr^Que&rQili^ means all (without exception) must
go; but, cr«u®fi^Lo(?Ly/r«(?a/«Sr®i5, means any one, at
least one^ (of the number) must go, (all need not go); lit.
although it should be who (he) must go. Thus also ;
^J^9 what thing $ ^^^i^^everg thing; crjpQjirQ^th^ any
thing,
lurrmir^ lofiat persons 9 «-f/r«i0t5, all persons ; iuir^ffir^^tl^
whatsoever persons ; any persons.
^Cjui^^ haw 9 <STLJui^iLjtl^ in what manner soever; criljutfu
luirQ^uxy in any way ; at any rate,
erdiajor&fy how much? erojajsir^il^ any quantity; eriimfrmT
® JAr^, any quantity,
mHjQutTQ^^^ xjohen,$ ^t^OuTQ^^uiy always; ^i^OuiTQ^jgir
w J*^> any time.
erna^ or sriiQaj where? cr/E/^/i, every where ; ermQsiufr^
^^^ any where.
er£srreoiiij what time? er&sirsOQfiih^ at all times; er&stireOu^O'
QxUfilj at any time.
It will be noticed that in one or two of these instances the
nature of the interrogative is such that e-iJo and ^Q^il affect it
in the same way. In reference to some of the other examples
160 SYNTAX.
also the distinction between a-^ and ^^S^^ is not always ob«
served.
Note 2. Verbs when in tiie fourth indefinite mood exert an
influence upon preceding interrogatives exactly like that which
is exerted upon them by affixing ^S^tjl^ thus :
^m&ir^^fifr^^4PfiQ^iret^fiQAfiCjQu^m!rm^ whoever comes
(any one that comes) shall get a present.
fOiufifitliLfe&resaitUfiSD^J'O^tLJjgn'^ih j^fi^QeO uiroJLDdr
€^C39SiuCjQufij;s&Qs»tr<armrw(rtLL^ir^^whatsoever good deed
thou doesty thereby thou shall not obtain forgiveness of sin,
6. From the interrogative letter cf is formed erdsTGi^,
what? whyl It is used —
(1.) As a pronominal adjective, thus:
CT63r6crsn'ffuj/s<sQfiyr#(?<F/r63r(^62(r, what things did he say?
(2.) Independently as a noun, and is thus declined;
Grdsr6(5r^€S)^y whatl Gi^ecr^^^Qeo, by what? er^Br
€(5T^S^a^, to whatl or, far what, S^c, ?
When used as a noun, it may stand either before
a finite verb, thus :
crmesT^esi^^ (or gt^€Ct) Q^djf^ndsr, what did he dol
^6ufrGT€^€iST0^^Q€OQ<3iiTuiD€S)t^iB^tTfr, why did he get
angry 1
Or it may stand after a neuter verbal noun ; and if
that verbal noun has only a subject expressed, Gresr^or
means ^^whaiV* if the verbal has both a subject and ob-
ject expressed, CTdfreor means ^'whyV^ thus:
«gy6iy/tG'(Fn'6sr€UTG^6or6Qr, what did he sayl lit. thai which
he said (is) what ?
<^€U/T«gy62s>^#G'<F/r6sr69rG'^6^6Qr, why did he say that?
THE PARTICLE Ul^. 161
NMe. From cr is also formed the interrogative particle sreory
why$ which is not used in common language. The common
people have changed it to ^^, which they use like criBr«ar^^(g)
Qet) or crorar, to express why ; thus:
^Zs-rs • /^ • > why did he do that 9
They use «7«w also as an emphatic particle of entreaty, thus,
/0^/r«&(?«)«r, or fn-Os'ired^Qm^^ pray say on ! Sometimes
they add it to the third person singular masculine future, thus,
Qs^n-^QjirQ^^^ which they then use with any person, thus :
/tti/i^L7ip-^QjF/r6&fiu/r<?«r«5r, why do you say so9
fitnhjt^Cjui^CjQuireutrQmAr^ why shall we go that way$
But tbis should never be imitated; we should say instead
Gr9Tar^0^QeDiuuui^^O^ira>^Q(ifjfiu, or, fiuCjut^Q^ir
section lxvi.
Particles.
(G..§ 82.)
I. The particle lji$l, as^ according to, is affixed to
any relative participle ; or to any noun in the oblique
case, (the oblique case in @6sr being generally used;)
thus:
jHeufraiLuQBnoSCuui^Qs'djQeud^, I shall do as he has
commanded,
Q^euedS'scr^^dsfut^tEuuiSfraefTfrSf may you walk ac-
cording to the word of God,
Note, The dative tJip-ijg may be added like ljijl to the
oblique case of nouns ; the meaning remains the same ; thus :
^Qj(V^6aiL^iueuS'«r^fidrui9.s-^^ or ) we did according
^QjQ^mu.tu&jjrairiljuif.^^J'O^tuQ/firuif ) to his word.
162 SYNTAX.
2. ui^ means a measure, a step; and when used
in the third case, ut^iurrio or uifLu5@)6i), it becomes
the particle because, by reason of, as, since, and is em-
ployed only with the present and past relative partici-
ples, thus :
/Su56s>^#G'<FiLi^ui^iufr<D ^iSaauuiLumu, because thou
didst this, thou wast cursed; lit. by the step at which
thou didst this, thou wast cursed.
3. When it is used in the dative case, ui^&^, or
in the adverbial form ut^iutrib, ui^iurrs, it denotes
purpose, end, effect, and must be rendered by so thai,
in order to. It is used only with the future relative
participle; thus:
u>€ff^frsQenuS!TC^s,§ihui^s^u (or uf9.ii/n'iULf or ut^iurr
<su) uarruiTi^ put^ ^iDmreusaniSiueiieo&^^fi^ jygjjuiS
@fr, God sent his Son into this world in order tcTsave
men; lit. to the step at which (he) unU (or may) save
men, God sent his Son.
Note, ^<^ is frequently used with the future participle in-
stead of t-"^*(5- Observe that ui^^ajir^, ui^i^y and «J«^»
must receive *-'^ when they are added to more than one clause
in the same sentence.
SECTION LXVII.
(G. § 83 to § 86.)
1. The particle ^ is used —
(1.) To give emphasis to any word. It then means
certainly, doubtless; and is called Q^^r^ib i. e. certainiy,
thus:
THE PARTICLES €7 AND ^. 163
iB^i^€0€U((^a^uL\aGifiQuj^fD^, doubtless praise ("or, praise
indeed) is that which is due to good poets,
(2.) As a disjunctive conjunction {i5ff^pio,) mean*
ing none other buty only, thus :
®fTn^Q€(STQ3fT(B^prT^f none other but the king gave,
(3.) As an euphonic particle. It has no particular
meaning, and may be added to any words, thus: u^lo?
^Q€0, ^QjG^GUf eT&sr&fu^^Geo, &c. It is however
better to avoid it.
(4.) As the sign of the vocative case, thus: ^£buli
Gear, O father!
2. The particle g? is used —
(1.) As an interrogative; it must then be annexed to
the word upon which the interrogative stress is to be
laid, thus :
^6uG,Q)Gui060Qjdsr, (is) he the strong one?
^eu^6ueO€0€uG^, (is) he the strong one?
iL^€Sina>^uQun&(ttjG^, does he go to Madura?
u)^€s>iTaGarTGufTdij;^G5F, does he go to Madura ?
If the question be in reference to several objects,
each of those objects receives 9, and an interrogative
pronoun usually follows, thus :
QaFT^^G^^rT^^G^eTQj^QjihftTdsrf who came, KdttSn
or Sdttdn?
s^^unojih iD^e^aauuiLuO^^^ atLL^Qetn^CB^foOprr
s.dfru(Saesiae6)iuQujQ^^aQan€ssr(BGunQQj€isfg^ atLt^
oefTvSCBdfoGptTej^cre^^, which (is) easier to say, (^or
command), *'thy sins are forgiven thee,^^ or **take up thy
bed and walk'^^?
164 SYNTAX.
-Sometimes the concluding interrogative pronoun is
omitted, thus:
^(Bf^iDrnh^eoinaCSiDmLniLuQiDrT, (is) that tree a Banian
or a Mangoe tree?
(2.) As a negative, thus:
iBn^QjihQ^Q^, did I come? meaning I did not come.
(3.) As a particle of doubt, when a question is raised
in reference to several objects. The first ^ may then
be rendered as whether, and the second as or, thus :
^{h^iDmh^eOmaQiDniLamnQoiny (I do not know) whether
that tree (is) a Banian or a Mangoe tree.
Note, Observe therefore that the sentence ^fifi^lfth^€diLSr
OiLirLLiTLajrGLDrr may be a question^ (see (1.) above); or it
may be an answer indicating doubt. But though the form of
both is the same, there is a wide difference in the manner of
speaking them.
(4.) As an interjection, both of wonder and pity,
thus?
^g^Qu/fujbsr, oht oh! what a great man!
€^€^QarTt!^{u^f oh! oh! what a cruel man !
(5.) As a particle of regret; for instance, some one
tells me that a traveller journeying alone, has been killed
by robbers; I reply ihrr^QufrsnUuQun^QeOtr, if four
7nen had gone (dong, would it have been so ! gp, therefore,
has the force of would it have been so ! or, would he not
have lived! The sentence then is about equivalent to
the English expression oh! if four men had but gone with
him!
3. The particle ^ is used —
THE PARTICLE S-U>. 165
(1.) As an interrogative; and, like €^, it must be
added to the word upon which the interrogative stress is
to be laid, thus :
euihprrturr, hast thou come?
Quut^iurrG^djpndj, hast thou done so?
(2.) As an interjection; it then, like gp, may precede
the vocative case, thus:
«»a;fr<J, or ) ^ g ,
Note, ^ is more frequently used as a simple interrogative
than fp9 because it is less ambiguous.
SECTION LXVIII.
(G. § 86.) * .
The particle SLih has various applications.
1. It is used as a copulative conjunction. It must
then be added to each of the several words which it
connects. All words may thus be connected by SLih,
except genitive and vocative cases, relative participles,
and finite verbs. (See sec. xxxv. 3. 4. and sec.
XL. 3.)
Note* It is both elegant and perspicuous thus to affix fi^t^f
when used as a copulative, to each of the several words which it
connects. This therefore should be the general rule both in
speaking, and writing. But a series of nouns, when the nouns
are in the nominative case, may also be connected together by
simply adding *-^ to the last noun only ; and, when the nouns
are in any other case, (genitive and vocative excepted) they
166 SYNTAX.
may be connected by changing all the nonns in the series iuto
the nominative case excepting the last noun, which must re-
tain its case, and receive C-ii)* thus:
^Qojir^&Q^irLLL-jB^jrso^iLjtli ^ifi^^ir^y he destroyed
the house, inner courts garden^ and well ; instead of ^i^9s>L-
2. £.(£) is also used singly.
(1.) To point out a negative. It then means even,
thus :
^su^6U^&k$^, even his coming (is) an evil; which
implies that his not coming also is an evil.
(2.) To point out something understood, thus:
QaniD^iheuikprr^, Raman also has come; which implies
that others had come before Raman came.
(3.) To point out completion, entireness, thus:
^Qj^€i5iL.\us€6Gr€Bt^rTeSGr(S€^^€uiBp€(5r, both his eyes
were red; which implies that the man has but two
eyes; if s.th were omitted, the sentence would imply
that he had more than two eyes, and that two of the
number were red. Thus also :
^iB^tBrtLLQ^QeiuBpd^iheuiBpfTiT&efr, the three kings of ike
TamU country came; which implies that there were
only three.
£.(£), in this sense, is added to interrogatives and
changes them into distributives. (See sec. lxv. 4.)
(4.) &.ib added to the fifth case forms the compara-
tive degree; (see sec. xxxix. 2.) thus:
^Qj^i^sStiS^&iQarrt^iuGSf, he (is) more cruel than a
tiger.
THE PARTICLES (Sim£)J AND eim. 167
SECTION LXIX.
(G § 87. § 88.) \
L TTie particles cr^^)^ and OT6w, besides being used
as indicative conjunctions, and particles of quotation,
[See sec. liv. 1. (1.) and (2.)] are also used —
(1.) As particles of similarity meaning as, like, thus:
@€iJ€Cf€kJ€S>!T^f5auuQ€sr^gfiSG5nhu€SSf€adf^^, he honors
ed him as Jm father.
waGiDestojefTniiipn^t he grew like a tree,
(2.) As copulative conjunctions. They are tlten ad-
dled to eadi noun ; and the total number of the nouns
with 2.d), may, of may not, be inserted after the last
noun; thus:
or aecQ€0^^(Lp^Q€tT^g^Ga't^Qajdsrg}ia€kft^n^f he
saw stones, thorns, and shrubs,
^n^pGesT€CTaOsnn)rDQ€eresf&!ifnDQesr€er (dpoj^ib) oyiB^rr
fraen, Saltan, Koitasn and Raman came,
(3.) In a peculiar manner; viz., to quote sounds,
thus :
^QiLuiDt^Osu^gneSL^iBp^, lit. the house fell saying idl^
IDL.; L e. itfeU with a crackling noise,
uuuuGoj^gjiOeuQjsoQ^dj, i. e. ^GSn^eSt^frmio, or, ^a
damnaOsusiJsoG^iL ; work without intermission, or, u)ork
quicldy,
^is^QuGsrsrigiB^n^, i. e. iFQ^uttibeiigik^n^, he rose sud'
denhj.
168 SYNTAX.
ffiirt2>L|6^«5r(?«S8rCTr®«j)<aF^^^, the pvke sounded saying
eSe&sf-j i. e. the puke beat strongly, or, loudbf.
As has been already stated, the several parts of the
verb €T^£pp^ are equivalent both to the particle erdnsii
and the several corresponding parts of the verb G^rrio
^Stp^ ; cresf therefore, although it is, when used as a
particle, equivalent simply to the particle Gid^r^, may
also be used as a proper infinitive of the verb er^
Stpsii thus:
9sa.Qn€iSiuu($€DSi ^esiro^h, Ooreiyoor (is) that which
shall be caUeda town; i. e. it has every thing belonging
to a town, and is therefore worthy to be called a town.
eiGST is here equal to cr^g^iQ^nioeO, thus: smQiTGsnj
uQeiJ^, or esaOu^ffijQffrTeoeOuuCBeu^,
2. The particles ^dsrmih and Qdsr^ih, still, yet, until
now, are used —
(1.) With reference to the future time, meaning
@6i^QiD^ih, thus:
Gu^, I told him to come; but (he) has not come;
I shall stiU wait,
(2.) With reference to the present time, meaning
@^6U€iS)rFAs^, thus:
^6u^€ij(!^ihui!^Q^rT^G€sr^ ^^^theuaeSioeieo, I tdd
Mm to come, but he has not yet come,
<
Note, These particles cannot, like the English yet, be used
with reference to the pcut time. We cannot say,
^ei2swjtS4r«rL0if.^^/rtfw, he beat him still ("or yet) more ; here
iSar^ib must be used instead*
THE PARTICLES ^Qsr, tSebr, ii^, AND GlDGO, 169
SECTION LXX.
(G. § 89.)
The particles (ipesr, (^ecrq, dp^mfr, (fp^ccnb, before;
iSew, tSesrq, dewecriT, after , hehmd; Jip, under , below;
QiLGO, above.
1. All these particles are used with the dative or
with the oblique case, in regard to place; thus:
a6ori(^6&rq (or, cr^dpdsrq) u>^usoae(TQprrGsri6€sr, tnounr
tains appecared before me,
dStlQIi^iJiSfi&rq (or, €;6Llt9.6srt36srL|) ®!i€&stQQpfi^a^esGf
Qf there are two streets behind the house.
€UiT€cr0^a^a£QLfi (or, eurresr^^&sfdGi^) yi£{q6^(S, be^
necUh the sky is the earth.
CT^^Qsoa^GiDGeo (or, ^osoaS^QioGeo) aeoosoGiufSih^tr
62^, he threw stones over my head.
2. GtDio 18 also used with the oblique case, in the
sense of t^on, concerning; thus:
Au.€S^GiDeoituik§rTnf he walked on the sea.
aft^^frGiDOeourrt^^dsr, he sang concerning the Lord.
erfkiaenGiLeSuib^ih, have mercy upon us.
Note, ^lB)ftS<sn(7to^9 which has been translated above as
oner the head^ may therefore also mean upon the head. In the
former instance, Oll^ is a noun governing its preceding noun
n the oblique case. In the latter, Qtn^ is one of the 28 poeti-
cal terminations used in forming the seventh case (see sec. xiii.
7.) ^ZsotS^Qinsliy when it means upon the head^ is equal to
^^MS^L^ffi^'j ^L,.$SldiQuiAtoaL-eSl9JllL,ffii&; &&s&r
e3
no SYNTAX,
Giii&> to er(Lse^i^f$A ; sIvfifilrQiSi^ to «/f^^^£«^^^9 al«
though JiftfifiSiL^^^ii is never used in the sense assigned to
*ir^^iTGui&> in the example above. Concerning the ^trilcoVj
Si^) see sec. xiii. note I.
3. (SiDio is xdso U9.e<]) as a particle meaning vfon, with
the genitive case; as:
^euhm>^Qitieo&sieu^f,^ns,&ihGuSf,n\j5^^Sfi Ae come*
pasmm which he had toward m was great, (lit. wluch
he put upofi us, Sfc.)
Note. Nouns ending in ^ may have these particles annexed
to their nominative cases ; thus :
jlfmmQfidr^ be/ore him. ^QJ^iSar^ lehind him.
ji/aeSrg/^, beneath him. ^«/5w(?ld^, upon him.
4. Two of these particles only, viz., (ip6sr and iSiSr,
are also used with the dative case in regard to tune; as:
^pfi&dP^G^^, hejore that; previous to that.
&.md^6€effS(D^Of6^i J was bom after you*
Note 1 . Cf ^ n^ay be thus used with the verbal noun of any
tense; thus:
^ir&iGLJ^&fl>^fi^Qfi^Q^9 hefoire J speak.
jsiraiGu&ar^fi^Qfi^Gsrj be/ore I spoke.
/BtTtStQuSr^fip^ftfimQar^ before I shall speak.
But ^^ only vith the verbal noun of the past tense ; th^s :
jBiTfSiQuira^^p^tljiS^Ljy after I had gone.
Note 2. Qf^ may be used with the future^ and tSw with the
past relative participle ; thus :
^fTsaQs'aei^iiQp^Q^HGuir^^y he went before I ^pake.
TH£ PARTICLES (^>dfr, S^, £^, AND QtOeO. 171
^/r«w(?Lj/r«riS«5rL^«-i(5iraStl/_/r«»-, he made a noise after I
had gone*
The common people use also dp^ and dpunQ for
6^\ it is not classical.
5. (ip^Qesf, t^pti&TLf, and (5e&r<q, lu'e also used adverbial-
ly at the beginning of a sentence; thus:
formerly he was a good man; but afterwards he became
bad,
6. dp^, iS6&r, S^, and Qid^, are also iised adjective-
ly, as :
(}pf)u^3ibt the front, or forepart.
djbusaihf the hinder part.
£ffiuuaaib, the lower part,
QiDpu&sib, the upper part,
7. (jp6ftr and i5ti6r are also used substantively, and may
be declined, as:
(ip^^QeoQun^^, he went before.
d^^OeoQutT, go behind,
8. ddff^tb and Qtoffith are used as conjunctions,
meanmg, moreover, again, besides, thus :
ddsr^ib (or, Qx&ib) Jnoj^Q^FndstesiprTQjfi, moreover
he said thus:
^mjQgaruddsrffiibjifii^^ptr^, he beat Urn aiUmore,
9. (SiL&) is often used twice with SLih, as Qw^ibQiL^
lb, or dtDdsrOtD^ib, which means more and more, increase
ingly, (2iD^(2iD^tb^fB^^a^, they ascended more and
more, 1. e. higher and higher.
172 BITNTAX.
SECTION LXXU
(G. § 90.)
iDiLQ, €U€Siff, u^oj&pih, and ^etreif, all mean Umitj
measure: and from these are derived the particles mtLQib
or iDiLQa^ib, euesiiTiiSeo, or euefsaraS^ih, or euesms^ib,
uffiuispihi and ^etre^ih, all meaning until, as far as.
They are used with the nominative case.
1. tDtLQib or tDiLQ&^ib is used most frequently in
regard to place, as :
^Qj^frtDtLQibaurrQeijmb, we shaUgo as far as thai village.
2. Qj€SimiSio, or Qj0Sim6^ib, or €U€fSitTB^tb, and u/fium
^th, refer either to tme or to />2ace, as :
cT^iQj€Sia&^QiJbd!rQeBr€u^^puu(B^^^ff&^, how long wSl
you trouble mel
tBrTib&^Qs^dsr9srutLL^€Csib€U€SimiSfiQ&^d!Fip0utTig^, token
we had come as far as Madras,
waesGFuSuj&^ib SL€iB[G5HDVL\€SiUiu6u^(6(!^ikj^ndsr, he was
faithful unto death,
3. All these particles are used also with the relative
participles: most frequently with the future relative par-
ticiples, thus:
JflQj^^s^uOurT^ibiDiLQih ^^mDfTdsr&Qeer eStLQLsOutrs
Gojekri^rrib, thou must not kaoe the baggage until (lit.
even (to) the limit in which) thou shcdt reach that vU^
lage,
afr^pfrojii^uietreifib, until the Lord come.
IDpp, tD^^f AND ID^^fh. 173
esstQojmpnm, thai king performed charity until hii
death*
They are sometimes used also with present and past
relative participles, thus:
ff^^aQansfT, take care of my household affairs untU I
return,
eJG!f^^6ni^(uiDCQ€^Qs'diGQj^, I toiU do as mudh as I
can,
^m&€(Tn€0ir€f5(iDC(B^Qffih\i{^aea, do as much as you
can.
SECTION LXXII.
(a § 91.)
1. iD/D{p is an adjective, and is equivalent to the word
other, when it is used in the sense of the rest, thus :
i£^aQemL\& £0s>[TaQefra:iihiDp(puupnfir^pibaQerTVL\ibQsn
(B0prTfr&&T, they gave fish, greens, and the other (i. e.
the rest of the) things.
Note, ">/ftpa^«Sr means, therefore, the other one, and can be
used only when two persons are alluded to. LDjtpotirjsar^ if not
restricted, means the rest of mankind; but if we use it in
speaking of any cltus or body of men, it means, of course, the
rest of that class or body.
2. tD^g)i and iDjpg^ih are used as adverbs, and mean
besides, or other in an ihdefinite sense ; thus :
iDn)n)(S{Baa[Tfiujib&QerruGu^^fr, he spoke many things
besides; i. e« he spoke many other things.
174 srWTAX.
has Ukeuoise toritten other blasphemous toords, i. e. not
,only tbese whidi I liave mentioned, but otfa^n also.
N'ote I . Observe that in these instances other does not mean
the rest, iLfiO(!!}(Bi9uar therefore means another one^ any other
one, lit., one besides; it never means tfie other one; it is equal
therefore to CfijCdp^a/cv.
^ote 2. The adjectives Uifip and C a/ jy differ. us/^/D alirays
means other^ in the sense of the re^t, Gwjpi means other in-
definitely, but never in the sense of the rest. For example ; if
you wish to say, that out of ten persons, two went east, and the
rest went south, u^fip must be used to signify the rest. But if
you say that two went east, others went north, others went west,
and the remainder went south, while ic^fip must be used in the
final clause, O^jgt or S^ir must be used in the two preceding
clauses. Qojjjt has two meanings. It also means other as to
Hnd; ue»differetU.
SECTION LXXIII.
(O. § 92 to § 103.)
1. Qet or Ss^QiDiOf hereafter, refers always to the
future time^ thus :
Qefi (or^ S€ifQtD€0)tBndaSuutif.uOuffiDinLQudsf, Itmtt
not hereafter speak thus.
2. The commiserating particle ^sCpUi/r is used as o&.'
alas! thus:
Q(piutr^iiiunujibi£^f, alas! haw much mjioHce!
Note. &QaJtr has been used, at a noun, with the dative caie.
THE PARTICLES Skt^t ^eSa, AND ^if 0/. 175
thus: tL<efa-£(g^(stun'^ woe be to thee! This is incorrect; it
can never be used as a noun. To express this idea, G€upt9ay
>^tSsrLAsr^ or some other such word, must be used, thus:
e(?iu/rft.€9rtf(5(?ai^«sw (or, fieSsri^Ua) ^(QLb, lit. alasl dis*
tress (nT^ punishment) will come to thee*
3. SnL^t together^ is oflen added to the social ablative^
thus:
^€uQ0Oi^&iL^uQunQ€Sf€isr, I went dbng with him,
4. ^eSu and €f>ifiu, except, are used with the noinina«
tive case, thus:
eistQQutri carry away all the deths excqH (ot, ha)
these two,
uLl($L(j^<s<£(^ita€Yr, cM (the rest) have submitted except
Sdttdn and Kottan,
Nate 1. The exceptives jyft»«>/ru)A, ^aS/r, and ^ififUi are
often used indUeriininately both in sentences that end with nega-
tive and those that end with affirmative finite verbs; but it is
better to use ^a)«;/rLO0) as an exceptive^ only in sentences
closing with a negative verb; [see sec. lx. 3. (1.)] and ^aSjr and
^tfiiu as exceptives^ only in sentences ending with an affirmative
verb.
Note 2. Two of these, viz. ^&edtruiA and 9£^^, are ifoih^
times added to the second indefinite mood, to express unless ;
(they must then always be followed by a negative verb,) thus:
f&jR^Ldjfiui^iLjtjbiSpJg^a'eOe^eon'Ui^^ (or i^/oJg^irOeOfrifiiu^
GuiiriL^'fgti^iusDL^iuuiirtLi&.^s^^ unless ye be horn again
ye shall not obtain heaven.
But this is not classical; it is far more elegant to use the
176^ SYNTAX.
abbreviated form of the negative verbal participle, (see sec.
XXVIII. 7. (2) note,) with aS^^TcJ) •, thus: fiiS^tSpaJir^iZ^
i-(r&> &c. ; and this may be followed by either a negative or aii
affirmative verb.
5. ^fo&^esifoiiJ, about, mare or less, is placed before
the number to which it refers, thus :
5T^<5^f;6onr)lu^i^a/(f5Q^^^<5^5LilS6OT^, after about seven
years.
6. S){p, off, from, without, is used with the nominative
case, thus :
^Qjeusar&arr^pOeuiLt^^dsr, he cut off his ear; lit. fte
cut him 80 that the ear fell off,
CT6&r«F/fe(p^<95U>rDtjGu#<g)/T, lit. he spoke so that my doubt
ceased.
Note, The ignorant use -flf/^ also in the sense of Jl^fiiuirs;
thus : ^lutuir j^psOdSirQcoiAO^iu^ir^j Sir^ he has done
mttch cruelty.
7. ^tp) S^^J^j or ^ip(l>^(?<sB/r€&sr(S, and mp^, mean-
ing around, surrounding, require the accusative case,
thus:
€T6sr6JiSor#^<pffi^Girr(fl5/E»«dT, > com£ around me!
8. &Q& and (pQs, quickly, hastUy, and QiDeoeo, slowly,
axe used adverbially, thus :
^Q&eufB^rr^, he came %astihf,
(tpCBauQuiT^dsr, he went quickly,
OuiiO€OiBuiBpnd^, he walked slowly,
9. QjsSiu, sponlaneously, freely, precedes a verb, thus :
^eSiu^^ikpnm, he gave of his own accord, spontaneouAf.
^^^ib A.ND j^uOi^uS(§fB^th.. 177
Nate 1 . This oJ^fU, which is an infinitive, must be distin-
guished from the adjective ^^lUf strong^ which is joined to
nouns and does not require the following «9 ^9 P% ^9 to be
doubled, thus: ^eSiujpiriliuLbj the strong serpent,
Note 2. *-t-» >FfiSir, ^tfiiu^ ^A (Sifi, «^*> Gf»®^» 0"<^
«)> and «^«^«-'> are infinitives used as particles, ^ps^sopiu
consists of two infinitives. See sec. xi. (>• (!•)
10. ^[S^^, concerning, abotU, requires the accusative
case, thus :
^€(srGears^fS^^GiurT^€uajFU€^^Q€u^, J shcdl consider
about you.
Note, QuM^ is sometimes used instead of ^fifi^i \
but it should never be so used, for it is not Tamil.
11. QededneSiLx^tr^y if not, unless, is always added to
the nominative, or used absolutely with reference to the
preceding verb, thus :
uG^iEei>€0fr^iLi^nG0^uua^u\5esi\^uQunib, how shall we
live wnless we have money?
this; if not, I will punish you.
Note, ^^A^T 18 the abbreviated form of the negative verbal
participle. (See sec. xxviii. 7* (2.) note.)
SECTION LXXIV.
(G. § 103.)
!• <^®@3rt&, or ^S^ih, or ^\6^ib, (meaning although
it should become, or be,) and ^uut^vSi^ik^ih, (mean-
t7$ SYNTAX.
ing abhaugh U is, or was,) are used, at the beginning of
sentences, as the disjunctive conjunctions but, yet. They
cannot, however, be indiscriminately used. Observe (fie
following marked difference between them.
<!•) <^®&^y %^&^i ^fipi^, are /onrlft mdefadte
moods; (see sec. xLViii. 3;) they are, th^efore, st^fpo-
sUious, and cauQOt be ^sed in reference to any thing
which acttuUy exists f or has been already done; thus :
uiTeBs^iBa3^Sf^t§uQurT€unfts&r, ,^^ibq0fuj€S>L^iuui(T
clL.ir/r<s^, sinners teiB go to hett; yet (key mB not get
good sense.
Here QufrBttrirs^^O^ih jg eqaal to Qutr^^d* the sen-
tence thezefore means although sinners thouid go to kell^ thejf
will not get pood sense.
Note, ^^J0t^ &c., idien thus used, always require the fol-
lowing verb to be in the future tense, with a negative either ex-
pressed or understood^
(2.) ^ULJt^a5($fl^(2) is a third indefinite mood; and is
not suppositious, but certain; (see sec. XLviii. 2. and
3;) it must be used, therefore, in reference to things
which actually exist, or have been okeady done; thus:
^uut^(iS(^ih^U) tDeffffsefT iD^crikfd^uL^^fofiOQeo, the
Lord has said thai mners shall go to heU; yet men do
not repent,
2. Again ^®^ib or ^'&^ui, when affixed to nouns
in succession, denote et^Aer, or; and, if the following
verb be negativci ne^Oter, nor; thus :
THE P^HTICMl Cgyti- 179
a&T, neither the king nor the beggar wUl enter the
heavenly kingdom, mdess they turn unto Chd,
Note. In this sense <^^&^ih has been incorrectly used in-
stead of the last ^3^u).
3* <^j^&'S or ^S^jib, when a^xed to only one
no\m, me^nsut least,. evert ; ihxis^ " ■
It
^(S^fS90ffs>^\unS&AG&iT(Ba^u>irCis.ffrr, wilt thou not
give at least ("or, even) a fanaml
Note. 4|^@)^t^ fg^Q^ih are also affixed to ioterrogatives.
(See sec. Ixv. 5.)
• SECTION LXXV.
(G. § 104.)
The particle ^st^» (the contracted form of crstf-
^ib,) is used like <^^u> in the following instances.
1. When affixed to an interrogative, it changes the
interrogative into the indefinite, (see sec. Ixv. 5.) ; thus :
^fi^€Si5rd(s[GriuQj€rTQQj^ibi4ffiuGSiunJipntLuff^,Satkun;'
nen toiU tiot get any sense.
2. When afijxed to a single noun, it means a( ka$t,
even, thus :
uf^uu€SsiOiD§^ibQarr(B, give at least tenfanams,
3. When ^§^ib is added to two or inore nouns, it
means either, or; and, if the following verb be negative,
neither, nor; thns:
180 SYNTAX.
QundffOm^ih G^erreyfCtugv^ Gs^ihQO^fBiQ&nQ, give
eUker gold, or silver, or copper.
SECTION LXXVI.
(G. § 106.)
1. iDtT^fm, ^errGif, §eusar, and ^oem, all denote
measnre, and are used with the demonstrative and inter-
rogative pronominal prefixes, thus :
^tbiDfT^fatb, ^QjQjeaeiff jtf^^Qsarj ^^^oesv, thai much,
@LbmrT^$rTih, Sojeuareif, ®^§Qear, Q^^emx, Ais much.
enhiDtr^fiTih, ereueueaGif, er^^oear, ei^^€i£saf,howmuch^
They may then be employed —
( !• ) Substantively ; thus :
SfB^OiBeo^erihiDrr^faihf this paddy (is) how much?
®uu65Brtb6r^^««r7 5 ^"^ ""^ ^""^ ^ "^ •
iiiBi6difSr^fO€fT6ifj)libu)n^$nQiD, the circumference of the
earth (is) thus much,
(2.) Adjectively; thus:
^ibiDtT0fiiiBpn6f^iu^GSipsQan(B^prTdsr, he gave so much
gram,
crf^eeartBtTiLiSfnuiTesisnh, how many daysjowmey?
2. UiiTfftTib, without any prefixes, has two uses —
(1.) It is used as a particle of restriction, meaning
ofdy, but; it may be affixed to nouns in any case, thus:
mn^tDn^^iribekj^Q^dsr, I only came,
Qesi^itiir^^ni^Q^neo^, say this only.
i^^w AND urreo, 181
(2.) It is added, in the seventh case, to relative parti-
ciples, and then means a$ soon as, at the instant; thus:
iDeoip Qu\jJ^u>rrffa0f(3€O ^tLQa^&rQerr QundiediLQt^
«^i I went into the home as soon as it rained.
Note, i^^9 with >^^ affixed, is used with the future rel^
live participle in the aen^e of until ; (see sec. Lxxt. 3.); thus:
^irmw0Jg^2ur^dgietQs(iS(Si stay here until I come.
SECTION LXXVII.
(G. § 106 to § 112.)
L The nouns Lj/pti), and urrio, meaning a side, apart,
are, with the demonstrative pronominal letters prefixed,
used as adverbs; viz., ^uqroih, jfjuurreo, on that side,
or, further; @u^^u>f ®uunio, on this side, or, hither;
thus:
/ ^ULfiD^O^rr^^, say on! or, say farther!
Si^motheutT, come hither!
JHuutrOeoOutr, go farther!
SuunQeoefSiQj, put (it) this way, or, this side.
These words may be united with nouns of place;
they then require those nouns to be in the dative case ;
thus:
^figfissuqfOU) (or ^^^asuqfof^^sti) GunQ^ih, we
went to the other side of the river.
Qs'^GsrutLL^csfsr^^^^uunGeOQj&G^nih, we came on this
side Madras,
ilpib also means the outside. It is then the opposite
p
of ^€yr, or '^^A, the itmde; and is used to e!sptiesB vnih-
dill, a^oa^; tbtts:
^^&f^iO(!P&, I ^Un and wWMt.
qfOffOeouSesi^i^Qs'neceon^tS, do not teU this oiU of doors.
uStLQs^uqro^^Qeo (or t^CQsi^unn^^^Lj) (Junr, go out
of the house.
The common people Jiowever say ^iLQ^auLirowQun,
go out of fie house.
2. Qutr^tLQ is usied —
(1.) With the future relative participle, to express
purpose, design; aiid means in order to, for the purpose of.
In this sense it can he used only of rational beingiii, thus :
jyA//V/sei)<5^/§^(?^(£/iqu)0un'($Ll(Sayffi^n'iT, he catne in order
to render justice to us*
(2.) With the nominative, or oblique case, of nouns ^
thus:
^eu^Gurr^CQ, for his sake*
<9= <f £r<762/<s^uj^46^G'Lj/r(n;tl$^es)^#C<7iiiG^^, I did it for
the sake of botUJy heahh.
^^dsfOun^CQ, for that pmpose*
Note. Oufr(j$tLL-rrs is also used for Ouir^iLQ.
3. liiS^^ih, or iHiB^^iDfTSf for the sake of, on account
of, is used with the nominative, or oblique case, of
noUns;thus:
^QjfTiSS^f^LDfTauuffrrurTdsr^^^SiT&^GdFdjQJn^, for hh
"Mke, ^roditiillbe gracious.
fiQs^dj^^pro^^ef^S^^ni^s&i^i^MuuQeutTdj, on occfHtni
of the sm which yo^ did, you ^ftftW be ptm^^
^GSiaiuniOi &c ; ^frs&r and ^rnb, 1€8
'■ 4. ^GSiSjutfiOt ^^peotrio, ,^j^uj^vS^}O€0, are used as
causal conjunctions, wherefore, therefore, at ibe tiegtn-
ningof a .clause or sentence; thus:
f^y the Lord wSH ^e §radQV»; therefore be glad.
Or, inaBmadi m» these wotds »nist ahmjs be pisceded
by a sentence, or clause, wbich f taUes some reason, or
cause, thej may jofiea l)e regarded as 4:onchding a clause
which states a retuan for the thing that is expressed in
the foUomng douse of the same sentence ; they must
then be rendered because, since; thus:
tD€Si^Gudja^ih^es>&(urTio§OurTsasnt^rr^, thou must not
go because U%iU rain.
5. The indeclinable particles ^/reiir, and ^rnh, (with
or without ^ affixed,) may, for the sake of emphasis,
be added to nouns in any case, ptr^ is used with
singular, and ptrih with plural nouns. They mean self^
very, indeed; thus :
j^^pn^lstQ}aifirdff, he himself came.
j)likpu6s>ue(5nu0p(TOGffQAasbsf(i6un, bring that very bag.
^fS^f^^rTGiLvufyaoerrffe^t^uunfr, the Lord hmadf will
punish you.
Note. Otniu^trm^ true indeed, or ^j^OuifU0tri6r^ (j^^ (i,^
true indeed, is, in Tamil, always placed at the end of the sen-
tence of which it is an affirmation, and not at the beginning or
in the middle, as in EngUah. OiAiu^ir^ must follow a verbal
noun; but ^^Oi^iufiirm may follow any finite Terb^ thus:
^mirOuiliuajjTirtS(Sfi^^iOiLiu^irtirj or > truly he was a
^t^ta^LrihJmrffffMS(^^jlStra'ai^f^m£)jiss'dtfy ^ffsmtmmi^
i«4 SYNTAX.
6. The particle Q^njgfiib (in poetry, <?^/rjpiib) means
every; it is used —
(1.) With nouns in the nominative case. It in-
dicates that such nouns are plural, although they may
be singular in form. The context must determine the
case in which those nouns are to be undertiood; thus:
^LS€i^KO^rrs)iib, every minute.
ihfrQun^ib {tBrrenGprrsinh) or f€miB<^fn^th, every day*
tDtT^ikQ^nffiiib, every month.
QJd^Q^^Q^rr^ih, every year*
(Brresf mj^QfoQcsr^jpi eS(BQ^n^u> (or eSamefTQ^fTjpub)
GumhffQs'rrio^, go to every house ani say thai I am
coming.
Here ^^C^frjftli ^ equal to w^/raf ^«©i®(i.
Note 1. Qfitrjfih mast not be confounded with ^wQmrf^^
fbr, although these words may be in some cases equivalent to
each other, in others, they widely differ ; thus :
•r3>*w-(?^/rj|»(^^«&n5l*«iy*®«Sr(P,and J mean ihtre ore
^^ >» r\ #.• ..-o** •/!*» male ehudr^n in
But ^diO^ir0Lff^sisQ*trQtlj means give one hook of every
kind that you possess.
Whereas Lif0SfiQ^irjf&Ostr(Btl^ means give books of
every kind that you have ; and does not specify any number.
Note 2. Observe that Q^frjuil is not extensively emi»ioy«d ;
it occurs only in certain connexions.
(2.) With the future relative participle; thus:
aioeoiTib, £PB€i>(yiib, ^oefSTf^th, 6lc, 185
SECTION LXXTIII.
(G. § 112.)
Neuter.
Mas, d& Fein.
^ aU things.
funcudftb,
all per WM.
These nouns mean aU in regard to number. When
they are united with other nouns, cfeaeonui and cteoeoft
^(b may be either prefixed or affixed ; ^a€0(ipu> and ^a
€0^ih are never affixed, but ^seo is prefixed to nouns
of any gender, and requires such nouns to end with
e^iib. All the rest are invariably affixed; thus :
ereoeOfTLBf^sfyaft^ib, or ^ ciiO€OtTiD€i^pi^s^ih, or ^
t£(i^ikis(?errioeorTth, ^ u>e<^j^iraO€rre060rr^ih,
ffaeoS(t^siBs^ihf
iS(t^a[Ba€treusat0^ih,
iS(Saibseir(tpi£CCitDmib,
iS(t^ fya&r(ipig€u^ih,
thus:
0^€ij^LB(i^a&ia€(T€usBr^GSipvi^(jp€isru(T&S^fr, God created
all the beasts.
(kuQsoaatrufraQmioeonesimii&skuiSQf call aU the ser^
vants.
WhOe these several words mean aB in regard to
mtmber, only two of them» viz./(j^6s>u»iq45 and (jf^gW'
^
iDSffpfraetnurroj^ib,
166 SriTTAK.
^tb can also be used to denote Ae whok of a ihimg;
that thing must then be in the singular number; thus:
S(^vjih(ip^jl^{b, <f^ vohdt heart.
Note I. (t^(yiMLOt^ij& aad QfiOfiW^ih can, in this latter Jinifle,
be united only with such neuter nouns as denote inanimaie
creatures. When affixed to neuter nouns denoting animate
creatures, they mean a//, in respect to number only; tiiua,
^^^Qf^Qfmm^iLitQ^irdjiSiLu-irm, does not mean he «te a
whole sheep^ but he ate all the sheep (of a flpck.) To e^reas
the former idea, we must say ^ffiriLif^vo/D^B^Qfim^n^^fPir
djiStLiurm^ he ate the entire Jtesh <{f « sheep.
Note 2. Some haye written C^HSf f^€^#^€A<^ *"^ Jir^Mtr
fi^^Q^^ to express the mth»le heart ; but this is inc^orrect.
AR&AN6I3)1ENT ^F €£|t7AjUir CMUflEa*
(•G. § 113 to ,§ 116;.and;§ 117 to § 119.)
1. The clauae which exp^e^s^s th^ i^mgn or emf of a
ieH^rnmaiUm, assertion, or conuMn^ always preoedes the
chiiise which contains that determiaaihm, assertion, or
command; thus :
^uGSiSQ'^L^^eo ^dbri^eskuiuo/l^aeffiTiS^MsetrrrM,
love your enemies, in order that you may be the Mliren
of God.
2. In all sentences in which a prior clause dnis
states the iAjeet or dettgn of the subsequent clause, if
thefinst clause be in the negffjtwof the Ufiiiomug ohnse
ARRANGEMENT OF CERTAIN CLAUSES. 187
most be in the ajjirvMUive form ; and tice v&sa, if the
latter dause be in the negative, the former must be
in the affidoiktive form; thus:
remain in tku jpfoc^i ksf ywt eye he injured.
an^^, do not ieave Ms place, lest your eye he injured.
3. The clause which expresses the cfime or reason,
precedes the clause which contains the effect or infer-
ence; thus:
Qso, we ad not proceed ^pdckly, hecause ike wind blew
hard'
tBibt5sesiaa:i&T€frQjfrse(rrrtjS^ib&&r, trust ye in Crod;Jctr
he is very grucum*
umD€6st^€O0^(ieo q^s^a^ iS^^fueod^ eu^f^^tt^^is
O^GP(ip&Te(r€kjfra€fTniiS^aaauMa^, rejoice; /or
your repowrd will be great in Ae(u?efi.
In sentences where ihe cjLaivse that contains the etmsee or
reasotis is very long, the order above prescribed may be inverted,
and the inteirogating phrases exhibited in Sec. liv, 3, may be
used. But to make such a change in short sentences, like the
foregoing, and say#^^ ^H^mirs jBt-fistSA^o srmmrfJ8(Q
Q«omQ)fisfrfijiHJSsQfiaifuJi^jp^ or ujrirujreilL^f09ii/ftitSi&
S(S^w»u^f»i.Juwffir9S(gJiQ(Sffry would be very awkwaid and
feeble.
4. When something is said of a subject both negflitive*
ly and affirmftttveiy, the negative always piie«edes ihe
188 SYNTAX.
affirming clause, by which the use of a disjunctive con-
junction becomes unnecessary ; thus :
^ &S^^t this boy is not dUigeat, but lazy,
not shine, but tros hid.
In a few cases this order need not be obsenred : but then the
negative must not be the opposite of the affirmative clause*
and the affirmative clause must close ^ith an auxiliarj verb ;
thus:
QDu.iuefiu^esrstBirf^Grarirfi(^i:jiS{^mmrirs9 belUvB in your
' beneficent Creator, and do not reject his comtnandsnenis*
5. In comparisons the thing compared must be im-
mediately preceded by that with which it is compared;
thus:
L|e^6S)UJu(»u/r€Ou^Qi5oru/r(u/E^^, the cat rushed forth Uke
a tiger.
€T66r62jF^i2) iDseusarvnib wsostTi^ih ^^smn&^^QfbiA^tpeu
€lsr(orms,§uurT^^!T€(5ri060, he who loves son or daughter
more than me is not worthy of me.
Here because ms^ariLfih and uiS%ftL^il are immediately pre-
ceded by «rfiw«;ft^Le^ the comparison lies between them and
cr^c^fjiS'l; all three of them being ohjecte of the verbal
GQjsQ&Qpeudr, But if you write listen (L{iliiie:^iiLjilermmJi
\gBtuijSisuiirsJ'9Q/Fe^QjDwj^^ &c., the comparison will lie
between ^ file's Uifres^QQj$Q&QtD^^ and «r«Sr«»jBrti, and the
meaning will be he who loves son or daughter more Man /
40y ^e.
But in Closes where the thing compared has a long
1RRAI«6EMENT OF CERTAIN CLAUSES. 189
attributive clause, the thing with which it is compared
may be placed between it and that attributive clause
provided no ambiguity arises from it; thus:
^fO^naS^d^ipffi, thy word is more predouB than goU,
Nat9, There are nz modes of ezpraanng the coopanUive
dogl0o;thu8:
this (Is) greatir thmm
thai.
u/r/fid jird) and ^fr^t^^M^ aie fourth indefinite moods;
See sec. xxvx. 2. (2.) and (4). utrH^ and «9^ are infinitires.
6. Parenthetic clauses, so frequently used in Europe-
an languages, cannot be admitted into a Tamil sen-
tence. If such clauses are to be translated into Tamil,
separate sentences must be made of them, unless they
can be otherwise conveniendy united with the princi-*
pal sentence ; thus :
Knov) then this truth, (enough for man to know,) vvrtue
alone U happineee below, Sojexieoa^fdeo^^tDan^sff
^deowrr^favb una£iU(ip€iaiutT^Qu>Gffuffi GiDUj^rr^i ^
Seven or eight (Sozomus makes U ten) months JuUan
staid at Constantinople, Sj^^funQatrdst^tStmiu^GAtr^
vd^&f^Li^i6Q€O0QifiiLQwn§t£^af(TdsF. uf^wnptBgt
ptTQ9M^jt»9^nQ^n(jpQQi^UQf€is[Q^tri)sBsSgiSiffi^.
190 snsTsix.
JL&ftAN«EM£NT OF WQBiDS.
(G. § 119.)
Worik tbat belong 4o die nominative shoidd not be
mixed up with words that belong to the finite verb.
Words depending on the norainalffre ahouid precede
the nominative, and words depending on the &iite
verb should precede the finite verb; thus:
«
LJU(B0^^^, hcwho ga^iereA great riches trmMeth his
housdML It would be very obscura to say 0^^(Dthufi
Dependent words must be placed nearer to, or farther
from their principal, according to their relative import-
ance ; thus :
^Q60rTff§wuaQArTQuiSQff^g)iO&tLunft&GiT, they ask"
ed, "Lord, wUt thou at this time restore the kingdom
(or, govertanent) to Israell^^; since this question refers espe-
cially to the time, Siisir^ffiQtoir is properly placed immedi-
ately before the finite verb. If jpo^irtTa/^^^igj be pirt in
its place, themeaning villbe-ifft/^ thou give U ttt thit time to
1SRA1L, or io some other -nathnt Again, if f^Mr^H^jff
9O0 be put innnediately before the verb, the meaning wiU be
mU Mou gwe mt this time the sin«ikijc, «r eomethkngelee $
Thus atsointhe^Qowing sentences, (wliich eositKiii
at nominative, finite Terb, and a ^dependent {>hfMe«} the
noaiiiiative|.or ihe -dependent ^pbrase^ is msde moit gx
ARRANGEMENT OF WORDS* 191
less prominent by its position in reference to the finite
verb;
means sangaralingah was in Madras; the man, and
not the city, is here the important word. But ^A*ir«S««
OLaAumsSi0^mmuiLL.edBr^fi(om)MSQ^^^trarf means Sari'
garalingam was in Madras; here our minds are chiefly
directed, not to the man, but to the place where he was.
^€iJf!$ssiL.iU€ijrruSiS(^^aui^ii>rr€SfQj(Tn0esifQiufT^gfiihqfD
Ljuu.^e0€i£0, NO DECEIT WHATEVER proceeded out
of his mouA.
If you should say suL^unrfsroiirirfwii^OiuirtSrjfiiLm^uiL^
iumiriSi9SI(gJg^i^puuL^€SAta»y it would mean that no deceit
whatever proceeded out op his mouth.
SECTION I.
DlTiatons of Time.
(G. page 273.)
1. The Dat. — The day, as distinguished from the
night, is called useo, and the night ®(r/r.
A day consisting of 24 hours is called /Error, when it
is considered as a part of the month; it is called 4ifi
e»iD, when it is considered as a part of the week; the
day or date of the month is called Qpdjf or G^^, and
is marked cl; a lunar day, t. e. the day according to
the age of the moon, is called ff.
The day is divided into 60 parts, called iBirifesia,
(vulg. tBiTif) ; each !Brr^€s>& contains 24 minutes; 60
(B/ri^^A are therefore equal to our 24 hours; each m
ifesia is divided into 360 parts, called Gmi^ or litSe^tb.
The night (viz., from sunset to sunrise) is divided into
four parts, called ^rriDib or luirtDib, Therefore (tppeon^
«rru)ib is from six o'clock in the evening till nine o'clock ;
SffdaurTf^^rriDih is from nine to twelve; midnight is
called (B(B^^rru>ib; (ipf^(n;^^mDih is from twelve to three
o'clock; and iBneon^^rriDib is from three to six o'clock
in the morning,
2. The Week. — The week is called ^ip69>u) or euit
nib. It consists, like ours, of seven days. These seven
days receive their names from the planets, called dir^ih^
F2
194
APPENDIX.
^niiS^, the Sun,
^m&e(T, the Moony
G^QjQjniu, Mars,
q^eSr, Mercury,
eSiurrifiib, Jupiter,
Qajehefi, Venus,
^6sP, SaJtwmt
in which the Natives include the sun and moon. The
term di^&SitD is added to the names of these planets ;
thus :
f^nv^^^aSi^GSiiB, Sunday.
^^EtLdi^esiW, Monday.
QffQjQjrrdjsStfiGSitD, Tuesdmf.
q^^^LpesitD, Wednesday,
ediuntfi&dL^GSiU), Thursday.
QeuetTCff&^l^esiU), FHday*
(j6vf<s<£zp69)C0| Saturday.
3. Months. — The month is called mtr^ib or u>/r^a>,
and is marked iS^. The first month of the year is ^^
^6Si!T, and corresponds to nearly half of our April and
May.
^^^^rr, corresponds to nearly half of AprU and Mof.
May and June.
June and July*
July and August.
August and Septemherm
September and October.
CkOober and November.
November and December.
December and January.
January and February^
February and March.
March and Aprils
4. The Year. — The year is called oj^^^ih or ^eSsrCBy
and is marked @&. But when the age of a person is
meant, €ij(^€i^ib is not used, but qjoj^, or ojium, or dun
(pth* which words literally siguify age. For instance,
65)fiL/<5Brr«#,
do.
do.
^^»
do.
do.
^^,
do.
do.
>^^^,
do.
do..
i\aCL.n<f,
do.
do.
euu^, (vu
Ig. ^puS,)
do.
Sffff0^€Si3f
do.
do.
wnnaiP,
do.
do.
«)^,
do.
^0.
u>n^,
do.
do.
uAr^eoF,
do.
do.
>OINTS aP TH£ COMPASS. 195
/ am ten fears dd must be rendered by efem&^uuf^oi
iu^€SS[(i, or u^^ui5ff[TtU(ipem(B, and not by ufy^eu^^ei^
(IpescrQ, But, / wag bam ten years ugo must be express-
ed by Qi^en^ibt thus, mnmiSfoi^uf^imiiSCi^iiifTf^^jpu
SECTION II.
* Volute of lAie Compass.
(O, page 27a)
A region, or point in the horizon, is called ^€S)^ or
The four chief points are:
£ifis^ or Jip^^QR^, the EtuH,
0p$i3 or G^^fSems', the SouA.
QtD^^ or QiD^fSeR^, the West.
euui,§ or QjL^fesiS'j Ae Nor A,
The four intervening angles are called 0)€i£o; they
are:
Gp^Sifis^, between East and South.
Q^dsrQiDip^, do. South and West.
€iJL^(Su>ip^, do. West and North.
€iJL^difia^, do. North and East.
In each of these eight points, the Hindoos imagine a
god to reside. These gods they call fs^unsoafr, the
keepers, or guardkms, of the points.
They are these :
S^trebp, the chief of the gods, in the East.
Si^dieff, the god of fire, in the South East.
@(uu)€&r, the god of death, in the South.
^6fj a king whom they esteem the most potent and
tiberal, in the South West.
196 APPENDIX.
€u,^esSF^, the god of the waters, in the West.
QjrriLi, the god of the winds, in the North Wesi.
^Quff^, the god of riches, in the North.
ffs^rrsardsi, Siven himself, in the North East.
The terms, above mentioned^ are also used as adjec-
tiresi thus:
difi&^0Q§9U>, the eastern eounliy, or region. *
£ifiauio, the eastern sea.
O^^QfD^Ui, the southern comtry.
Q^^&i^eo, the south sea,
QiL^^fOp^ih, the western country.
Qmeosi^io, the western sea.
euuQ^s^U), the north country.
€ijuauio, tiie north sea.
£ifiuuaaib, the east side.
Qp^usaih, the south side.
Qu>iouaaib, the west side.*
Qjuuaaib, the north side.
SECTION III.
Terms of Relationsliip*
(G. page 279.)
The Tamulians express the word relation, by (jfiGstp
or fi_/D€>/; for instance, £.6or<s^ib^Q;g{)f<s^<i)(ip«s)p(?tfi
eSreoT, whaJt relation ore you and he (to each other)?
Particulars are these:
*lt we write diMfiuJtst^ it will mean the upper tide.
TERMS OF RELATIONSHIP. 197
*The faiher is called, Ic^auu^, cjijuudst, ^&€Si^,
or iSprr.
The elder brother of the father, cQui^tupauu^t
The younger brother of the father, c4fimf&uu^
cSppuu^, d&c.
;t;The miHher, c^irdi, c^^^n&r, cjyibuxror, ^m^^,
The mother^ elder sister, cQuSiu^nh, c Guff tun ffiir^,
cQufiiuihiDn&T, &c.
The mother^s younger sister, c ffiiu^nuj, e ^p^^pirea
The grandfather, both on the fatherjs and mother^s
side, currtLu.^.
The grandmother, both on the father^ and mo^A^'«
side, cu/rdtf..
§The father^ sister, c^^esip.
*Thete words, metaamg father, are also sometitnet used to desig-
nate the faiher^s brothers ; but not frequently, lest he who so uses
them should give others occasion to say that his mother has more
than one husband.
■hThe letter c is prefixed to those terms which are in most
common use in Madras.
:S:The8e words, meaning mother, are also freely used to designate
the mother^s sisters and the teives ofafather^s brothers. But they
generally prefix the distinguishing adjective QuiliUj or S^fitu^
thus, Oufiiu^imuy Qfiiu^triu^ &c.
§^J<B>/P i" also sometimes used to designate the mother of
one*s t&t/r, or the mother of one's husband; but Lo/riA is the
common term to express this relation of mother-it^law.
198 APPENDIX.
*The brother of the motkery ctoffwdiF, csnibiDtrehr, c^n
Brother* and sisfer^, cskLJudfi^k^haw, OFOsn^oA
The dder brother, or the dder son among the sons of
the father's brothers, or among the sons of the mother's
sisters, c^eSsraafdir, cpesiu>iu€br.
The younger brother, or the younger son among th'e
sons of the father's brothers^ or among the sons of the
mother's sisters, c^i2)tS.
The dder sister, or the elder daughter among the
daughters of the father's brothers, or among the daugh*
ters of the mother's sisters, c^^&rr&r, c^to&GSis,
The younger sister, or the younger daughter among
the daughters of the father's brothers, or among the
daughters of the mother's sisters, e^bs^^, c^&a&s.
t A man, cq(f$Q^6&r, ctDetfpdr,
A woman, c&O^/f,
^unruDor also means the father of onels ivt/e, or the faiher of
one^s husband, and 9,father*s d8ter*8 husband^ as well as a mother^s
broiher,
'^LDvS^ifs^ means human beingt. The nouns ^oir, a male
and Qu^^ a female^ are prefixed to other nouns both of the
u^ujirfi^Bur and ^^^jS^em class ; thus :
QumsriL&sir, daughters
^e&-^fit»jry ^ horse.
QueStr^f^miffy a ma/re*
TERM^ 6P RfitATIoNSHlP- 199
The huijibafkij cif^ge^^r, mima^, ^asro}^, u^etssrojm
€ff^, Garri§(B^, uff^^tr or u^^tf, ^^(ipeiSiuajn^^
(wxlg, c ^<afihi^L.iu[T^.)
*The wifefCGuebsf^n^i c G'u6&^^rrCi^j{peifior€^ifsmui^,
Any one of the infers broiherSf may be called csmjd^
^esf^, (vulgarly and coaunonly m#«£or^, co^^/reiir.)
But this term is most commonly used to designate the
mfe^s younger brother, or the hushancPa younger ■ brother ^
or the hmhcmd of a tnan^g mter^
It also means a cousin who is the motherh hrother^s
son, or the father^s sister^s son*
Any one of the tdfe^s sisters may be called 6^u>^6oF,
(vulgarly and commonly ip^mef^f u)#d?6oF#^.) But
this term is most commonly used to designate the
mfe^s younger sister.
It also means a man's younger hrother^s wife; also a
cousin, who is the mother^s, brotherh dauber, or the
fatherU mterh daughter.
The wifeh elder sister, c^fpwrriSiunn, c0.s>ni^ih$.
fThe husbands younger brother, cGarrigikpekr,
The husband^s sister, whether elder or younger,
Persons who have married tujo sisters call each other
*L/(9«^cSr, a man^ is commonly used to denote husband \ and
Oumrs'irfij which means female kind, is used to denote wife,
fThe husband'^s younger brother is also commonly called
Lc^^fgrMT, Lc^^/resr. See above.
2DQ APPENDIX.
c«F<S6065r. Persons who have married two brothers are
called, ce^djuiSi^iunrr, c^u&^^inrrh.
Several women, married to one man, call each other
A mother^s brother, also a father4n4aw, also a father'^s
sister'^s husband, cwnuo^.
A mother^s brotherh wife, also a motheT^m4aw, c LDirtS.
A soi^^n-law^ cw^wa^.
It also means the son of a man^s sister, or the son of
a woman^s brother,
A daughter-in-law, citaQiD&efr.
It also means the daughter of a tnm^s sister, or the '
daughter of a woman's brother,
A grandson, cQua^, cQusrui^efroefr,
A granddaughter, cQuhf$,
The Tamulians often add ^h, as an honorific, to
these several terms; thus: ^auu^n, prriurrfr, iDnm^fr,
iDirSiurrrr, pesiiLiu,Q)fr, piD&€S)aiuiTfr, &c. iLnft, or u)nrr&en,
is added to them to form their plurals; thus: ^auud&r
u)/TiT«dT, ^{TUJLDrrrraGiT, unrtD^iDniraefT, LpmSiDniTa&T, Qucr
iLnhaea, Gufr^^LDnffaerr, &c.
HINDOO CYCLE.
301
SECTION IV.
HindiM) Cycle, and Ageu*
(G. page 274.)
The Hindoos have a kind of cycle, consisting of
60 years; to each of these years, they give a sepa-
rate name. Subjoined is a list of them, with the year
according to our reckoning.
2 eSuQj,
3 maSeO,
4 iSfrQUDrrffiff,
5 6oQ9npu^^t
6 ^miff^j
7 ^dps,
8 UQJ,
9 (qoj,
10 ptr^,
11 FF^«IT,
12 Gaj^/r6«ftti,
13 tSawrrf,
14 eSsduiD,
15 eSsr,
16 S^^nuir^,
17 mun^j
18 ^(T[F€SST,
19 U/T/t^^U,
20 eSfiJ,
ft
i)
>y
a
>}
n
ft
ii
a
$t
a
a
a
})
a
a
»)
)j
1807--a
1808—9,
1809— 10,
1810—11.
1811— J2.
1812—13.
1813—14-
1814—16.
1815—16.
1816—17.
1817—18 OQjtr,
1818—19.
1819—20 6ff*
1820—21.
1821—22.
1822—23.
1823—24.
1824—26.
1825—26.
1826—27.
202
\
APPENDIX.
21 9(^S^j^,
0/(^0^0)
1827—28.
22 £F(f^^m?,
@>
1828—29.
23 eSaiTiT^,
li
1829—30.
24 €SdfSf,
>>
1830—31.
25 an,
))
1831—32.
26 l5iE^€l5r,
**
1832—33.
27 eS^tu,
1)
1833—34.
28 ^(U,
>l
1834—35.
29 U)69ru>^,
»
1835—36.
30 ^^(ip£,
}l
1836—37.
31 CQ?6Tru)[5,
»j
1837—38.
32 ^errihd,
" .
1838—39.
33 eSa/r/f,
91
1839—40.
34 ^rraeki^,
)l
1840—41.
35 i56i)€ik;,
jl
1841—42.
36 SruSd^f
>l
1842—43.
37 Q^fTud^i^j
>f
1843—44.
38 ^inr^,
}>
1844—45.
39 eSdrOjnoj&r,
it
1845—46.
40 uanueij,
it
1846—47.
41 i5506i;<&dB,
ft
1847—48.
42 ^60<5,
})
1848—49.
43 Gd^emSiu,
if
1849—50.
44 ff<Tp(T!T€sar,
a
1850—51.
45 eSQim^Sd^j
it
1851—52.
46 u/f^/TtS,
it
1852—53.
47 tSatDfT^s'f
li
1853—54.
48 «^/BfS^,
ti
1854—55.
49 tmiLff^,
a
1855 56.
50 fl5«r,
if
1856—57.
•
HIIfDOO AGEfl.
2
51 (Sj&Aorr,
fi;({^a^(0
1867—58.
52 sneOfH^ff
@1)
1868-^69.
, 53 ^^^rrfr0f,
1859—60.
54 OcTOT^^if,
1860—61.
56 ffitkwf,
1861—62.
56 ffi^iS,
J
1862—63.
57 (S^OatT^&fT^,
1863—64.
58 ff^^niL^f
1864—65.
59 ^(^mr^ersr,
1865—66.
60 ^il<7uj,
1866—67,
203
They use these names chiefly in legal transactions;
but in &mily concerns, which are for perpetuity, as
well as in the inscriptions of temples, they join to the
name of the year, the year of the sra of Salivahana
and that of the 4th age. About the Hindoo ages I
shall give an account presently.
As for the epoch of Salivahana (^rr^ojirassrih,) it
is the most memorable among the Hindoos, from which
they reckon their years. This epoch dates from the
death of Salivahana, king of Visnagar, which happened
in the 3179th year of the 4th age, and corresponds
with the 78th year of the Christain era; s'tT^QjtTa€srth
means the vehicle of the cross, or crossbearer. Who
can help thinking that this alludes to our Lord Jesus
Chrbt ? Many circumstances coincide to make us be-
lieve that the whole account of ^n€S€urT&esnb is a per-
version of the history of Christ. See more on this
subject in the Asiatic Researches.
Moreover the Hindoos make the duration of the
204 APPENDIX.
world to be four ages, called a^am, each of which con-
sists of a large number of years.
The first u| sib is called dQirpna^aiby i. e., the age of
innocence ; the golden age of the Greeks. It ccmsist-
ed of 1|728,000 years; in it the bull of justice stood on
four legs. The second iLi&ib . is called ^G0^inq<si&, or
the silver age; consisting of 1,296,000 years. It was
inferior to the former; and the bull stood on three legs.
The third qatb is called ^£^i/ru0iq<sib, or the brazen
age; consisting of 864,000 years. It was still worse,
and the bull had only two legs. The fourth \i\3,ilh is
called a«S^«u>, i. e., the age of strife and misery; the
iron age ; consisting of 432,000 years. This is tke ^9
in which we now lire ; and the bull is kft standing od
only one leg; which allegory aptly represents the Wfc*
tering state of virtue, and the pre?ala)ce of sin.
In the Kanda Furanum, we are informed of the man**
ner in which these ages have been calculated. It is
thus:
The time that is necessary for the middle finger resting
on the thumb, to be taken off quickly, is one instant,
equal to the twinkling of an eye; this time is called
mrr^^GSiff or aestseof^ssitD,
2 tD(T^^€Siffi tnake 1 i^uLfgib.
10 ^uqg-iT), „ 1 A66Qru).
12 &€saftb, „ 1 eS^t^,
60 GS.^t^, „ 1 fBnifiesia.
7 mtf€Sia^ „ 1 a'lTiDtb, or the 8th part of a day.
8 ffntDib, „ 1 Krr&Tf or day.
15 (Brrerr, „ 1 ud^to, or half a month.
HINDOO AGES. tOS
2 utL^ih, make 1 inn^thj or a month,
12 wrrpih, „ 1 Gud^ci^ib, or a year*
100 eU(!$€i^iih is the common term of the life of man.
These 100 years multiplied by 360 (because each year
contains so many days) make 36,000. Tliis number
mohiplied hy six on account of the six subdivisions
miT0^€ffirT, ^Liqffti), &c., makes 216,000, which is the
basis of the calculations, respecting the durations of the
four ages* The calculation then proceeds thus :
216,000 multiplied by two, in honor of the quality
of virtue, and of vice, gives the number of 432,000,
whidi expresses the duration of the a^Sqatb, or fourth
age in which we now live.
216,000 multiplied by four, in honor of the four
vedams, makes 864,000, which is the number of yeara
of the ^a7/ruffU|<sib, or third age.
216,000 multiplied by six, in honor of the six Shas*
trams, makes 1,296,000, which is the number of the
years of the ^(Supnrvqaih, or second age; and lastly,
216,000 multiplied by eight, in honor of the eight
points of the compass, produces 1,728,000, being the
number of years of the dGa^nmsw^ or iirst age.
The united years of these four ages make the number
of 4,320,000, called ^#;irit|«ii), i. e,, the four ages of the
world.
2000 ^^{m|<£4£>, (i. e. ^640,000,006,) make one day
and one night of Brahma, or 24 of his hours; 60,000
^^(TiL/Aib, are one of his months; 12 such months
constitute one of his years; and 100 such years are the
term of his life.
p3
206 APPENDIX.
The duration of the life of Brahma makes only one
day of Vishnoo's existence; 30 of such days form one
of his months; and 12 such months constitute one of
his years; after 100 such years he will die, and then
Siven alone will exist.
This calculation is certainly ingenious; but at once
points out what -we ha^e to think of the boasted anti-
quity of the Hindoos. It does not rest on any history
whatever, and is a mere invention of the brain.
The Bramins prepare annually an almanac, which is
called ue^^triiaih, a Sanscrit word composed of uq^,
five, and ^&iaih, a member. It is so called because
it contains hve points of information, viz. 1. It shows
the ^^, the da^ accor£ng to the age of the moon, 2.
eutrffiby Ae dcy of the week. 3. iBiLiF^^fftb, the consteUa-
iion in uMch the moon enters every day. 4. Qtunaib, the
good and bad days. 5. acraerib, dwinoHon, augury.
V
•N
r
n
ID-;
}11
IS
if
/
Live Music Archive
Librivox Free Audio
Metropolitan Museum
Cleveland Museum of Art
Internet Arcade
Console Living Room
Books to Borrow
Open Library
TV News
Understanding 9/11